Nuance Dragon NaturallySpeaking 14.0 Guide

1

Chapter 1: Introducing the Nuance

Management Server

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Overview

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional (DNS Professional) with Nuance Management Server in the Cloud introduces a client-server architecture to DNS Professional.

Instead of installing a copy of DNS Professional on every user's machine and administering

Dragon from the software's Administrative user interface, you install the Dragon Client on each user's machine, and administer the DNS Professional from a centralized server that Nuance hosts.

The Nuance Management Server in the Cloud allows you to administer all of your Dragon clients at once.

Network setup is straightforward and efficient when you use the NMS Server to apply consistent settings to many workstations running Dragon Client throughout the facility, changing multiple settings on the NMS Server with the click of a mouse on its Nuance Management Console.

You can take cross-network action on Dragon clients from a central NMS Server: n

Create multiple sites where Dragon Clients are installed and assign the same backup location, roaming user profile storage location, and amount of archive storage/playback space to all users on one site in a single stroke.

n

Grant, revoke, and manage all dictating users and administrators (NMS Administrator)

licenses, including viewing the number/type of licenses used/still available.

n

Create groups of users and then assign entire groups to one or more sites, all at one time. n

Search through groups of users for those associated with a particular site.

n

View/access Dragon logs on every Dragon Client workstation.

n

Audit session events across the entire network (who logged on when and other related events) for a particular slice of time or particular user.

n

Display a complete list of all downloaded updates and approve or not approve installation of them—all from a single window.

1

2

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide n

Create user accounts for users, then use simple software tools provided to quickly upgrade old user profiles, then associate upgraded profiles with new user accounts n

Choose to upload speech data to Nuance's Research department for particular users or all users in your organization.

These features help you to readily manage a network of Dragon Clients.

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional components

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional is made up of software modules that include clients, servers, databases, user profile directories, and web services that integrate with one another.

The modules are in these groups: n

Nuance Management Server components n

Dragon Clients n roaming user profiles directory (on any server of the network or on its own machine)

Nuance Management Server components

The Nuance Management Server (NMS Server) components are: n

Nuance Management Server (NMS) — Main Web service that drives DNS

Professional and helps it interact with external clients and servers by carrying out several vital tasks involving allowing user access, determining settings on servers and clients, and storing information about user preferences and transcription formatting.

The NMS Server also stores user identification and related administrative information centrally, keeping user profiles available at any site the user travels ("roams") to within the organization and its affiliate facilities, whether the machines are located in different offices of the same site or at other sites in distant cities. If you have DNS Professional with NMS in the Cloud, your NMS server is hosted by Nuance. n

Nuance Management Console — An interface to the Nuance Management Server for managing set up of all Dragon Clients on the network.

Dragon Client — Receives and interprets user or healthcare user dictation, producing text corresponding to each user's speech. The Dragon Client sends the text into a target application and also preserves text and audio in the speech profiles.

Roaming user profile directory

Roaming user profile Directory — Central storage area for roaming user profiles for dictating . A single central storage location applies to a particular site in DNS Professional. A roaming user profile contains the accumulated speech information for a particular user from all the Dragon Client workstations where that person has dictated, enveloping the language the user speaks, the accent (if applicable) used, vocabulary or vocabularies, and microphone and/or dictation recording device. These user profiles are called roaming user profiles in other editions of DNS Professional, because their existence at a central location allows speakers to

"roam" from location to location and work with the same profile. (These profiles are unrelated to Microsoft Windows user profiles.)

Nuance hosted servers

Nuance hosts servers and services at its headquarters that your DNS Professional network interacts with:

Chapter 1: Introducing the Nuance Management Server n

NuanceLink — Hosted by Nuance on the Internet. Automatically downloads various updates to the NMS Server over the Internet.

Behind the scenes web services on the NMS Server help it interact with all of these clients and servers as well as carry out its own processes to manage the entire DNS Professional network.

Who works on the network

Two types of people work on the network: n

System Administrators — Manage the entire system through the Nuance

Management Console.

n

Users or end users — Dictate using the Dragon Client.

Stand Alone Mode

You can also run Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional in stand alone mode.

Stand alone mode functions like previous versions of DNS Professional, where Dragon is not connected to the Nuance Management Server, and you install and administer Dragon on the same machine.

If you run Dragon in stand alone mode rather than connected to the NMS, you will see the following differences:

• Sharing of words, commands, and command sets is not available through the NMS. The

Administrator can use a command-line tool to share these objects between multiple DNS

Professional installations. For more information, see Appendix: Managing Custom Words

and Commands in Stand Alone Mode on page 264 .

• The Administrative Settings - Roaming tab is available.

• The Administrative Settings - Miscellaneous tab is available.

• The Connection Center is not available.

• The Enable NMS option on the NMS Settings tab is disabled.

Enabling Administration with the Nuance Management Server

When you install the Dragon Client, it is in stand alone mode. To switch to using the NMS as your administrative server, take the following steps on the Dragon Client:

3

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide

1. Navigate to Tools > Administrative Settings:

4

2. Click the NMS Settings tab.

3. In the NMS Options section, click the Enable NMS checkbox.

4. In the Server field, enter the address of the NMS server.

5. In the Login Options section, select one of the radio buttons. Your administrator will tell you which selection is appropriate for your site.

6. Click OK to save your changes.

User Groups Worksheet

Before you begin to enter specifics into the Nuance Management Console, you need to gather required information delineated below. Having these lists available in advance saves time and provides a framework you can use to develop the configuration that works best for your facility.

Chapter 1: Introducing the Nuance Management Server n

Names of all people who will administer the system.

n

Names of all users that will dictate using the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional client.

n

Groupings of users based on the client settings and options they will use.

n

Names of all locations within your organization where the system is deployed; a site in

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional is one or more locations all storing roaming user profiles in the same directory folder.

n

Names/IP addresses of all the computers that will run the Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional client.

n

Names of computers and full UNC paths to all locations where you expect to store the roaming user profiles for users.

n

Names of computers and full paths to backup locations.

Recommendations

Nuance recommends that you plan the naming of the components of your organization and the structure of your groups before you begin to configure Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional. n

Site names should reflect the set of roaming or non-roaming user profiles for users associated with the site. For example, if you divide your user profiles by location, you could use that location in the name of the site, as it is more helpful than using Site 1,

Site 2, and so on.

n

Group names should reflect the user accounts that are members of each group.

However, if you have more than one group of a specific type, you should distinguish the groups by adding the group location to the group name; for example, Writers-

Longwood, Writers-Northwest.

For your convenience we have included a User Groups Worksheet at the end of this section

to help you analyze the needs of the groups in your organization. See User Groups

Worksheet on page 7

Configuring your organization

As part of the initial configuration, Nuance provides the following default components: n

Organization n

Site n

NMC Administration Group n

NMC Administrator User Account

You will rename these components to meet the needs of your organization.

Prerequisites: n

Encrypted license key: Nuance adds this key to the Nuance Management

Server.

n

Default login credentials: Use the following information to log in to the Nuance

Management Console:

5


User Login: The unique user ID for your organization. Nuance sends the ID to your contact person.

Password: The unique password for your organization. Nuance sends the password to your contact person.

To configure your organization

1. Log in to the Nuance Management Console using the credentials sent to you by Nuance.

See Accessing NMS Server: Logging in through the Nuance Management Console on page 10.

2. Rename the default site.

See Viewing, modifying, and deleting sites on page 38.

3. Rename the default administrator group.

See Viewing, modifying, and deleting groups on page 53

Steps to configuring other objects in your organization

When you have finished the steps above, you are ready to create and configure user accounts, groups, and, if necessary, sites required by your facility. The list below summarizes the configuration process and the references give you access to more detailed information on each step.

1. Create and configure sites (see Configuring a site in your facility on page 34).

2. Create groups for individuals who will either administer the NMS Server or use Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional for dictation (see Understanding groups on page 41).

3. Create user accounts that assign each user or server administrator in the Dragon Nat-

urallySpeaking Professional system a user name and password (see Creating user

accounts on page 56).

4. Install Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional clients on local and remote workstations of your organization. For details, refer to the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Installation Guide.

Notes: n

In most organizations, user accounts should only be added to more than one group if the same user will both dictate with Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional and administer the NMS Server.

n

If a user account belongs to two groups, the settings for the group listed first under

Group Memberships supersede the settings for the other groups the user or administrator belongs to. Likewise, if a group belongs to more than one site, the settings for the site listed first for that group supersede the settings for other sites. For more information on relationships between settings for sites, groups, and user

accounts, see Understanding groups on page 41.

6

User Groups Worksheet

Chapter 1: Introducing the Nuance Management Server

7


Group using same setting or option:

Type of setting or option

Action controlled by setting or option

Vocabulary

Administrative settings

Default vocabulary

Create DM-IV profiles by default

Types of commands Mouse motion and speed

Enable HTML support

Enable commands in HTML (web page) windows

Dictate "Click" to select hyperlinks

Group 1 Group 2

Recognition mode switching

Web search

Desktop search

Email/calendar

Cut shortcuts

Delete shortcuts

Copy shortcuts

Left variable delimiter

Group 3

Auto-Formatting

Right variable delimiter

Enable Natural language commands – Word

Enable Natural language commands – Excel

Enable Natural language commands – PowerPoint

Enable Natural language commands – Word Perfect

Enable Facebook post commands

Enable Twitter post commands

Abbreviate common English units of measure

8


Type of setting or option

Group using same setting or option:

Action controlled by setting or option

Abbreviate titles

Allow pauses in formatted phrases

Automatically add commas and periods

Caps Lock key overrides capitalization commands

Expand common English contractions

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

Format ISO currency codes

Format other numbers

Format phone numbers

Format prices

Format street addresses

Format times

Format web and e-mail addresses

Insert two spaces after period

"million" instead of ".000.000"

Format US Social Security Numbers

Format UK and Canadian postcodes

Date format

Numbers, if greater than or equal to

Prerequisites for the Nuance Management Console

The Nuance Management Console (NMC)is a web-browser based application that is part of the overall Nuance Management Server (NMS) system. The NMC supports many functions for Nuance applications.

On the computer that will access the Nuance Management Console, make sure the following items are installed: n

Microsoft .NET framework. See System Requirements for Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional on page 166 for supported versions.

n

Full trust privileges

9


Intranet or Trusted Web Site n

Internet Explorer See System Requirements for Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional on page 166 for supported versions.

Adding the Nuance Management Console URL as a trusted site

1. In Internet explorer, Select Tools -> Internet options -> Security Tab -> Click on Trus-

ted sites icon -> Sites.

2. Enter the Nuance Management Console URL

3. Click Add.

4. Uncheck the checkbox Require Server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone.

5. If you see the following security warning, click Run.

10

6. When the file downloads are complete, you will see the login screen. Enter your User

Login and Password and click Log in.

Accessing NMS Server: Logging in through the Nuance

Management Console

1. Open a browser window in Internet Explorer. See System Requirements for Dragon Nat-

urallySpeaking Professional on page 166

2. In the URL field of the browser, enter the URL of the Nuance Management Console. You should have received this URL in your welcome letter from Nuance.

3. When the Nuance Management Console log on box appears, enter the user name and password you received from Nuance.

4. Click Log in. (You should change the password before you exit the Nuance Management

Console.

5. The Home page appears.


This page displays links to the various features of the server:

6. From here, you can view: l

User Accounts—Each person who needs to use the NMS Server

(NMC Administrators) or to use a Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Client

(users that dictate) requires a user account with a user name and password to gain access. People who are NMC Administrator users interface with the Nuance Man-

agement Console only to manage the system and people that are users access only

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Clients to dictate. As an NMC Administrator, you can add a user account, search for a particular user account, and/or change a user's user account information and/or settings, and delete a user account.

l

Groups—You can assign users to logical groups that identify either the specialty, locale, or another unifying characteristic of the group members, but you usually group members together who are using the same Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional settings and options, including formatting options for the results of dictation. Users in a group should also store their user profiles in the same location. Once users are in groups, you can change the user settings for all members of the group at once. Once you assign the same settings to all group members, you can later modify those settings for a single user in the group. You also use groups to assign levels of Nuance Management Console administrator access.

l

Licensing—You can view the number of NMC Administrator and Dragon Pro-

fessional licenses that your organization has purchased from Nuance, how many are assigned, and how many are still available. In addition, you can grant and revoke those licenses.

l

Utilities—Administrators can view and send messages to users, as required. Messages provide notifications about when words or command sets are updated in the NMC.

8. Before you proceed, if you are not planning to configure the NMS Server in Active Directory, you should change the password of the initial login account Nuance provides. To

change the password, refer to Change the NMC Administrator password on page 11 and

then return here.

9. To access and add to your organization information, proceed to Accessing and adding to

your organization data on page 13.

Note:

A user that is affiliated with multiple organizations, will find that each practice or organization has a distinct organization ID. In addition, each practice or organization can assign that user a different user name and password.

Change the NMC Administrator password

Any time after you first log on to the Nuance Management Console, you can configure global settings for the entire Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional network. Those global settings include: n

Initial log/password n

Number of SQL trace lines to display (limit the number to avoid them scrolling off the screen) n

FTP path on the data collection server

11


To change these settings, you take these steps:

Caution:

If you are planning work in the Active Directory Services interface, do not change the password of the account Nuance supplies for initial login until after you have configured Active

Directory.

For more information, see Setting up the Nuance Management Server to run Active Directory

Services on page 18 .

1. In the upper left of the screen, click on the circle icon with the NMC logo see the following options, shown in the illustration:

. You then

12 l

Change password, with a person symbol l

Upload NMC Log File, with a wrench symbol above it l

Log out, with a back arrow above it

2. Select Change password and the Change Password dialog box opens. After you have logged in for the first time, this dialog box is where you change the password of the NMC

Administrator account that Nuance provides for initial login. In the User name text box, you can change the name of the user ID that Nuance sent you. Enter your old password, then the new password. Then confirm the new password in the Confirm password text box and click OK).


3. In the NMC Application Menu, you see headings for several types of settings that you can click to open and close the information under them: l

General l

Nuance Management Console l

Nuance Management Server l

SMTP l

Data Collection FTP l

Reports

4. If you do not see any settings below General, click that heading and set the settings (see preceding illustration): l

Disable scheduled NMS database backups — Select this option to turn off any scheduled back up operations for the NMS database.

l

LINQ to SQL trace output—Click/select this check if you want the NMS Server to use LINQ to SQL technology to send database messages that NMS SQL Database generates to a list, tracing the messages so that you can monitor them. If you have trouble with your system, Nuance Technical Support or Service personnel might need to look at these messages.

5. If you do not see any settings below Data Collection FTP, click that heading and view the settings (see illustration below). Nuance sets these values for you and you normally do not change them, except in rare circumstances when Nuance asks you to.

l

Data collection FTP server path—You should see the location of the Nuance Data

Collection FTP server that the NMS Server uploads collected data to.

l

Data collection FTP server login—Enter the login name that the NMS Server should use to log in to the Nuance Data Collection Server to upload collected data.

l

Data collection FTP server password—Enter the password that the NMS Server should use to log in to the Nuance Data Collection Server to upload collected data.

6. Use the SMTP section to set up and enable a mail server on the Nuance Management

Server. For details, see Enable SMTP.

Accessing and adding to your organization data

Once you have accessed the Nuance Management Console, you are in the Home tab.

From here you can view your organization information and enter details about your organization by taking several steps.

Notes:

13


Enhancements help you find and manage items and data in an organization. For

details, see Finding and managing organization data

.

n

Many organization level options are now located on the Organizations Details screen

on the Products tab. For details, see Configure product settings for an organization

.

n

Typical enterprises have only one Nuance organization GUID, a single string of numbers and letters that Nuance assigns to you as a customer. That identifier is for your entire organization.

1. Under Sites, click Organization Overview. The Nuance Management Console displays the Manage Organization screen which contains: l

In the Organization text box the Default organization name. l

A list of the organization's Sites. Initially, you see the Default site. You later change this site's name to match one of your sites and create additional sites as well.

l

To view a group, expand a site. l

To view the users that belong to a group, select the group. Users are displayed on the right side of the screen.

14


More About Nuance Supplied Groups and Licenses l

The NMC Administration group includes two initial user accounts, one the account you used to log in for the first time. l

NMC Administrator licenses, the type of licenses required to set up the network in the NMS Server through the Nuance Management Console.

2. To view or modify the organization's information, click the Details icon in the Sites >

Organizations ribbon.

Organization Details—General tab

The following fields are configured by Nuance Order Management. You can configure the fields. However, that action should not be necessary.

n

Organization name: This is the customer ID that Nuance created when it created your organization. You cannot edit this field.

n

Contact name: Enter the name of the person Nuance should contact to interface with your organization.

n

Email: Enter the email address of the person in your organization that Nuance should send email to.

n

Organization ID: You see the organization identifier that Nuance assigned to you. You can always find this identifier here.

n

Date Created: The date the organization was created.

Organization Details—Address tab

n

Street 1, 2, and 3: Enter the address of your organization's headquarters.

Individual sites of the organization show the address of its other particular facilities.

n

City, State, Zip, Country: Fill in the City, the State (to the right of the City field), the Zip code (below the City field), and the Country of your organization's headquarters. Individual sites of the organization show the address of its other facilities.

15


Organization Details—Products tab

n

Use the settings on this page to set organization level options for your products.

For Dragon Professional, the Organization Details > Products tab contains a section called Dragon NaturallySpeaking. This section contains the following setting:

Upload user data to Nuance for research purposes: Click/select this check box to upload data from your dictation and user profiles to Nuance so that the company can improve future versions of the product and further enhance speech recognition technology. The data transferred is encrypted.

For more information, see Configure product settings for an organization .

16


Organization Details—Organization Tokens tab

n

Use the settings on this page to create a token for an organization. For more

details, see Creating Organization Tokens .

17


Organization Details—Domains tab

n

Use the settings on this page to add an Active Directory connection string. For more details, see Set the Active Directory Connection String .

Setting up the Nuance Management Server to run Active

Directory Services

You can use Active Directory Services to manage your DNS Professional network. Ideally, you should decide to use Active Directory Services before you install the DNS

Professional network because enabling Active Directory Services requires that you perform specific steps during the installation process. However, you can enable Active Directory

Services before or after you have installed the DNS Professional network.

Enabling Active Directory Services

2. Creating NMC Administrator Account in NMS Server for Active Directory Administrator: l

Install the Nuance Certificates on any workstation where you want to log in through the

Nuance Management Console. (Refer to the Nuance Management Console Help.) l

Log in to NMS Server using the admin login Nuance provides.

l

Prepare to create user accounts by changing the name of the organization/site Nuance provides to match your organization and site.

l

Create an NMC Administrator user account for the Active Directory administrator.

See Create a user account

.

l

If you would like, create all other user accounts now; or you can create user accounts later.

l

Create Single Sign-On User Accounts: If you want to set up to log in only once, you can set up Active Directory Single Sign-On user accounts (they are optional); see

Creating Active Directory Single Sign-On user accounts on page 18. You need to cre-

ate these accounts before you can associate a user account with an already existing upgraded roaming user profile.

3. Set the Active Directory connection string .

4. Continue to configure the NMS Server as Active Directory Administrator l

Follow instructions in the Nuance Management Console Help.

Creating Active Directory Single Sign-On user accounts

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional supports Active Directory Single Sign-On, which allows users to log in using their Windows credentials.

The following sections describe how to configure Active Directory Single Sign-On accounts.

Note: For the most current information on how to configure Single Sign-On accounts, see the https://isupport.nuance.com

website.

Implementing Active Directory Single Sign-On

When you implement Active Directory Single Sign-On, you set up to automatically log in when they have logged in to Windows. In this type of setup, avoid having to enter their login and

18

Chapter 1: Introducing the Nuance Management Server password multiple times.

Steps n

You must configure the NMS Server to use Windows Active Directory Services. For

more information see Setting up the Nuance Management Server to run Active

Directory Services on page 18.

n

You must set up Windows Domain user names and user account login names that

are identical. For more information, see To configure Active Directory Single Sign-

On .

If the login credentials for an existing user account do not match the user’s Windows login, you must delete the user account and create a new one. Make sure the login credentials for the new account match the user's Windows login credentials.

To configure Active Directory Single Sign-On

1. During the process of creating useruser accounts in the NMS Server, be sure to assign a login name that matches the user name of the provider's Windows Domain login name (see the next illustration).

In the Login field, enter the user name of the provider's Windows Domain login name.

The logins for DNS Professional and Windows must be identical.

For example, if a provider's Windows Domain login name is one of the following:

• "Domain\John_Doe"

• "[email protected]"

You enter "John_Doe" in the Login field.

19


For DNS Professional, for each Dragon client, perform the steps in Enabling Dragon client computers for Active Directory Single Sign-On .

Enabling Dragon client computers for Active Directory

Single Sign-On

To enable the Active Directory Single Sign-on feature for Dragon users, perform the following actions on each Dragon client computer.

Enable Active Directory Login in the Dragon Client

Take the following steps on each Dragon Client installation:

1. In the Dragon Bar, go to Tools > Administrative Settings. The Administrative Settings dialog appears.

2. Click the NMS Settings tab:

20

3. Select the Enable NMS checkbox if it is not already selected.

4. In the Server field, enter the address of the Local Authenticator.


5. In the Login options section of the tab, select the Use Windows single sign on radio button.

6. Click OK.

You can help Nuance improve the future quality of speech recognition by sending speech data from your network to Nuance on a regular basis. No personal information is ever sent to

Nuance and participation in data collection is completely voluntary.

The process of accruing the speech data that Nuance can use is called data collection.

When you turn on data collection, you let the Dragon clients collect up to 500 MB of text and data per user about optimizations performed and send it to the Nuance Management Server to be stored.

The Nuance Management Server then uploads the data every night at 2:00 AM. Only

Nuance can change this schedule.

Turning on data collection for your site

To turn on data collection for your entire site, take these steps:

1. On the menu bar, click Organizations > Search.

2. Enter search criteria and click the magnifying glass.

3. To see your organization's information and add details to it, click the Organization >

Details icon in the ribbon.

4. Select the Products tab.

5. Expand the Dragon Naturally Speaking section.

6. Select the Upload user data to Nuance for research purposes option.

7. Click Save to save the change.

21


Turning on data collection for individual

or users

You can also turn on data collection for individual end users in the User Account Details tab under the Network Edition US sub-tab:

1. On the menu bar, click the User Accounts ribbon, then click the Search icon in the ribbon under User Accounts.

2. When the name of the user appears in the User Accounts screen, double click the name to open the User Account Details for that healthcare provider.

3. Click the Dragon Professional tab.

4. Expand the User Account Options section.

5. Go to the bottom of the User account options section and click the Upload dictation

data to Nuance for research purposes check box.

6. Click Save to save the change to the user account settings.

7. You can repeat these steps for selected individual user accounts in the NMS Server.

22


Privacy of your data and Nuance data collection

When you implement Data Collection it is for sending recognition data to Nuance to improve the accuracy of this and future products. Nuance works with collected data because our software can learn from experience about the language you, and your fellow professionals, use. We track the vocabulary, syntax, and pronunciation used by professionals in practice, and our experience makes our products more accurate and easier to use for you and others.

Nuance will never pass your recognition data on to anyone else or use it for any other purpose other than as set out in this notice.

Nuance will only collect recognition data (on behalf of your organization), and will collate and combine it with recognition data collected from other health professionals using Data

Collection. We will not store the recognition data under your name, the company name, or an individual’s name, although the database will contain a search function enabling such terms to be searchable within the database.

Nuance will use the recognition data in accordance with your organization’s instructions. We use it to conduct research in order to enhance and improve the accuracy of this and future products.

The only people with access to this data will be our employees, permitted agents, subcontractors, etc. on a need to know basis, all of whom are bound by obligations of confidentiality to keep the data strictly confidential.

Nuance will transfer the personal data to its Data Collection sites that may be located outside of the EEA. However, Nuance shall ensure that any such transfer is compliant with the EU Data Protection Directive.

Our corporate policies and practices, and our contractual commitments to your organization, require us to take appropriate technical and organizational measures against unauthorized or unlawful processing of any personal data that you have provided to us and against accidental loss or destruction of, or damage to, that personal data.

23

Chapter 2: Overview of NMS in the cloud

This chapter discusses NMS in the cloud; how it works, how it differs from hosting an on-premise NMS, and how to upgrade to NMS in the cloud.

Overview of NMS in the cloud

Nuance Management Server (NMS) in the Cloud stores data objects on the cloud server in the

Nuance data center. These objects include the following profile customizations: n

User account n

Text and Graphics/auto-texts n

Custom words n

Custom Command Sets

Storing objects in NMS in the cloud allows organizations that have more than one Nuance product to share data across multiple Nuance applications. For example, if an administrator at an organization creates an auto-text in the Nuance Management Console, that organization's users can see and use that object with Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional as well as any application that uses Speech Anywhere Services.

What will be different when you migrate to NMS in the cloud?

This section describes what you can expect when moving or upgrading to the NMS in the cloud configuration.

Note: Text and Graphics and DragonTemplates are supported. Text and Graphics with Lists are not supported.

n

NMS is hosted in the Nuance Data Center instead of being hosted in your organization.

n

The cloud NMS stores all the Dragon user settings. n

Management - Your administrators access the cloud Nuance Management Console to configure and manage users. This provides the administrators with one place where they can view and manage all product licenses for NMS supported products.

25


Shared content (profile sharing) with other Nuance products. Text and Graphics/autotexts and custom words can be shared between DNS Professional and

SpeechAnywhere Services powered third party applications.

n

Single and centralized cloud management of products.

n

Management of cloud Text and Graphics/auto-texts using the cloud Nuance

Management Console.

n

Management of Dragon and NMS settings that was previously accomplished using the on-premise Nuance Management Console is now done using the cloud/hosted

Nuance Management Console.

n

User profiles are enhanced with customizations; auto-texts and custom words that are defined at the Site or Group level.

n

Importing, exporting, and deletion of user profiles is not available in the cloud NMS.

These features have been moved to the Dragon client for Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional.

n

An administrator can back up and restore a user account from the User Accounts screen.

n

In some cases, you may need to install and configure an NMS “Local Authenticator” when on-premise LDAP or Active Directory support is required.

n

Speech node collections are defined at the organization level. n

NMS download packages are distributed to individual organizations instead of to everyone on the system.

n

You can add comments to organization tokens n

The Organization Tokens tab and Credentials tab are visible to all administrators.

Managing user logins

User logins in the cloud must be unique. If a user’s login is being used by a user in another organization in the cloud NMS, this is a user login conflict that needs to be resolved before the user can be migrated to the cloud NMS. For example, if you are upgrading "Bob" to NMS in the cloud, and user login "Bob" already exists in the cloud NMS, this is a naming conflict. For more details, see Move data from an existing user to the cloud NMS server.

Organizations using LDAP/AD

If you are using LDAP or Active Directory to authenticate users, there should be no conflicts when moving to the cloud. The NMS uses a “domain” along with the login which maps to a unique organization.

1. Install and configure the NMS Local Authenticator.

2. Minor configuration of the NMS Local Authenticator is required which basically consists of setting a domain name and the LDAP address where non-trusted LDAP/AD functionality

is required. For details, see Install the Local Authenticator .

Organizations using NMS native credentials

If you are using NMS native logins to authenticate users, when you move to the cloud, the

NMS native logins may conflict with existing user accounts. For example, if your organization has a user login called “bob” and a user login called “bob” is already in use in the cloud system, you must change the user login before you can move that user account to NMS in the cloud. The Local Authenticator is not required.

26


The Cloud Migration tool considers a user account on an on-premise NMS and a user account on the cloud NMS to be the same if their user logins are the same and both accounts belong to the same organization.

Using the Profile Association Tool

The Profile Association tool is only required for US customers that are upgrading from a version of DNS Professional that does not support NMS in the cloud.

Administrators install the Profile Association Tool in a location that: n

Has access to the profile store n

Communicates with the NMS in the cloud

The workflow for using the profile association tool is: n

Nuance sets up an Organization for your organization in the cloud NMS.

n

Your administrator uses the cloud Nuance Management Console to create user accounts n

Your administrator runs the standalone Profile Association Tool to:

n

Search the user profile store for available user profiles that require user accounts n

Search the cloud NMS server for user accounts that need user profiles n

Allows the administrator to map the user profiles to the user accounts.

Authentication

After you upgrade a user account or a Dragon client to Nuance Management Server (NMS) in the cloud, users must log into the system using the Dragon client in connected mode. This action authenticates the user with the NMS and allows them to later use Dragon in disconnected mode.

The user cannot use Dragon in disconnected mode until they first login to Dragon in connected mode.

The following only applies to organizations that are using LDAP/Active Directory SSO for authentication. NMS native credential users do not require the Local Authenticator.

Since the NMS is no longer on-premise, you must install and configure the “NMS Local

Authenticator” to query your LDAP/Active Directory store and validate user credentials. You install the “NMS Local Authenticator” at your site and configure your Dragon Clients to point to the Local Authenticator. The Local Authenticator tests the user credentials and sends authentication requests to the cloud NMS to retrieve data.

Profile importing, exporting, and deleting

Since the NMS in the cloud does not have access to the profile store, this functionality is no longer available in the Nuance Management Console. Instead, it is available and performed through the Dragon Client.

If an administrative task requires the importing, exporting, or deletion of user profile(s), someone must perform these actions on the Dragon workstations. For details, see the

Dragon Help.

27


Overview of Installing and Configuring NMS in the Cloud

This section provides an overview of how to install and configure Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional with the Nuance Management Server (NMS) in the cloud. For a detailed list of steps and prerequisites, see Dragon in the Cloud Installation Checklist in the Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional Installation Guide.

Overview of Installing and Configuring NMS in the Cloud

You will complete the following steps to install and configure Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional with the Nuance Management Server (NMS) in the cloud:

1.

Before You Begin

2.

Set Up Your roaming user profile Host Machine

3.

Install the Local Authenticator (Optional)

4.

Install and Configure Dragon clients

Before You Begin

Before you begin, Nuance will send you a welcome email containing the information that you need to install and configure NMS in the cloud, including: n

The URL for NMS in the cloud.

n

Your Organization ID.

n

Your administrator user name and password.

n

An alphanumeric token that you will need to install the Local Authenticator.

Keep this information on hand; you will need it as you install and configure DNS Professional with NMS in the cloud.

Install the Local Authenticator

If you want to use LDAP or Active Directory Single Sign On for your authentication, and are using NMS in the cloud, you must install the NMS Local Authenticator.

The cloud NMS cannot test LDAP credentials inside your organization. The NMS Local

Authenticator fills this gap by testing LDAP credentials. If they pass verification, the Local

Authenticator sends the credentials to NMS in the cloud for processing.

You install the Local Authenticator on a local server that is accessible to both the cloud NMS and your Dragon Clients. Once a client authenticates with the Local Authenticator, the cloud

NMS server is used for all other client requests; using the session the client was granted during authentication.

If you want to use Dragon's native authentication, you do not need to install the Local

Authenticator.

See Installing the Dragon Client in the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Installation

Guide for instructions on how to install the Local Authenticator.

Set Up Your roaming user profile Host Machine

Set up the machine that will host your roaming user profiles. For more information, see

Setting up the roaming user profiles machine and Checklists for Setting up a file server for

roaming user profiles in the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Installation Guide.

28


Install and Configure Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Clients

Follow the instructions in the "Installing the Dragon Client" chapter of the DNS Professional

Installation Guide to install the latest Dragon Professional clients and configure them to use either NMS in the cloud or the Local Authenticator.

Setting the NMS download location

1. In the Nuance Management Console, in the Organizations section, click Organization

Overview.

2. In the Organizations section of the ribbon, click Details.

3. On the Products tab, expand the DNS Professional section.

4. In the Downloads section, select Download from cloud.

5. Click OK.

Logging existing and new users into NMS in the cloud

When a user logs into the Dragon client, Dragon queries NMS to get the user login information for the user. Dragon uses the login to find the user profile folder for the user.

In all versions of NMS, user logins must be unique.

NMS introduces changes that make it easier to move users to NMS in the cloud. When you move a user to NMS in the cloud, and the user login already exists in the cloud, that user login will have to be changed as a part of the migration process. To avoid having to rename the user profile folder, NMS provides Dragon with the user profile folder name (instead of the user login). Dragon uses this information to find the profile folder for the user and log them into the system.

For a new user, the NMS generates a folder name using the format login_GUID and returns this to Dragon. Dragon uses this value to create the profile folder for the new user. NMS only appends the GUID to the profile folder name, not to the user profile.

For example, for a new user profile "bob", the NMS generates the folder name: “bob_

35B5CB9B-922B-47FB-AA20-AE2E515D9802”.

"bob' is the name of the profile and is stored in the folder “bob_ 35B5CB9B-922B-47FB-

AA20-AE2E515D9802”.

When the user logs into Dragon, NMS authenticates the user’s credentials and returns a unique name for Dragon to use to create the user’s profile location.

After you upgrade a user account or a Dragon client to Nuance Management Server

(NMS) in the cloud, users must log into the system using the Dragon client in connected mode. This action authenticates the user with the NMS and allows them to later use

Dragon in disconnected mode.

The user cannot use Dragon in disconnected mode until they first login to Dragon in connected mode.

29

Chapter 3: Configuring sites

You can create and configure sites for your organization. Each site represents a location on a server where you store user profiles. Typically, each site corresponds to a physical location in your organization, such as a hospital, clinic, or data center.

Often you need only one site for your entire organization. Sites help you define the structure of your DNS Professional Network. The options that you choose for a site affect all of the user profiles stored in that location.

Searching for an organization

The Search Organizations screen allows you to search for an organization by name,

Organization ID, and/or license type.

To view and use the Search Organizations screen, you must have the rights to view more than one organization in the Nuance Management Console.

1. In the Nuance Management Console, click Organizations.

2. In the Organizations area, click Search.

3. On the Search Organizations screen, one or more of the following fields: l

Name: The name of the organization.

l

Organization Id: An identifier that Nuance assigns to you as a customer. l

Status: One of All, Enabled, or Disabled.

l

License type: A license type that the organization uses.

4. Click the magnifying glass. The Search Organizations screen displays the search results with the following information: l

Name: The name of the organization.

l

Organization Id: An identifier that Nuance assigns to you as a customer.

l

Status: One of All, Enabled, or Disabled.

l

Users: The number of users in the organization.

5. To view and modify sites, groups, and settings for an organization, select the organization and click Manage (the bottom right of the screen). Clicking Manage makes the selected organization the 'current' organization in the Nuance Management Console. All organization fields in the Nuance Management Console will use the selected organization as the default value.

31


6. To view details about an organization, select the organization and click Details. This action displays the Organization Details screen.

Finding and managing organization data

NMS introduces changes to the Manage Organization screen to help you manage an organization's data.

When you first open the Manage Organization screen, the Organization field displays the name of the currently managed organization. You can change the value in this field. Changing the value will change the data that the Manage Organization screen displays.

The left side of the Manage Organization screen displays a tree-like representation of the current organization: n

The first element in the tree is the current organization.

n

The second element in the tree is the sites element. To view the sites in the current organization, expand the sites level.

n

The third element in the tree is the groups element. To view the groups in the current organization, expand the groups level.

To view information about users that are part of a site in the organization, or part of a group in the organization, in the tree, select the site or group. The Nuance Management Console displays the following information about the users at that level: n

First Name: The first name of the user.

n

Last Name: The last name of the user.

n

Login Id: The login name of the user.

n

Licenses: The licenses that the user has.

Searching for sites, groups, and users in an organization

The tree structure on the left side of the Manage Organization screen contains an element called 'Click here to search'. This item is at the same level as the organization element in the tree. Use the 'Click here to search' item to search for sites, groups, and users in an organization.

1. Click the 'Click here to search' item. A search field appears to the right of this item.

2. In the search field, enter search criteria. Search for sites and groups by their name. Search for users by their login name. Search criteria must be at least 3 characters in length.

i. To search for a site, enter the name of the site.

ii. To search for a group, enter the name of the group.

iii. To search for a user, enter the login name of the user.

3. After you enter the search criteria, click the magnifying glass.

4. The Manage Organization screen displays the search results under the 'Click here to search' item as follows, where x is the number of matched items for that object: l

Sites (x) l

Groups (x)

32

Chapter 3: Configuring sites l

Users (x)

5. To view sites, groups, or users that matched the search criteria, under the 'Click here to search' item, expand the Sites, Groups, or Users level.

Note: You can only view the top level search result objects. For example, if a site is found and displayed in the search results, you cannot click on the site to view it's groups.

Using right-click actions to find and manage organization data

In the Manage Organization screen, you can use right-click actions to find and manage objects in the organization tree.

Organization level n

To view details about an organization, right-click the organization and select Details.

n

To set an organization as the default organization, right-click the organization and select Set as default.

n

To add a site to an organization, right-click the organization and select Add Site.

n

To add a group to an organization, right-click the organization and select Add Group.

Site level n

To view details about a site, right-click the site and select Details.

n

To add a site to an organization, right-click a site and select Add.

n

To delete a site, right-click the site and select Delete.

n

To add a group to an organization, right-click a site and select Add Group.

Group level n

To view details about a group, right-click the group and select Details.

n

To copy a group, right-click a group and select Copy.

n

To add a group to an organization, right-click a group and select Add n

To delete a group, right-click a group and select Delete.

n

To add a user account to a group, right-click the group and select Add User

Account.

User level n

To view details about a user, right-click the user and select Details.

n

To add a user, right-click and select Add.

n

To delete a user, right-click the user and select Delete.

n

To create back up copies of one or more user profiles, right-click a user and select

Backup user profiles.

n

To restore one or more use profiles, right-click a user and select Restore user

profiles.

n

To request Dragon logs for a user, right-click the user and select Request Dragon

logs.

n

To view client logs for a user, right-click the user and select Client Logs.

33


Configure product settings for an organization

An administrator sets many product settings at the organization level. On the Organizations

Details screen, the Products tab contains expandable areas that contain settings for different products that use the Nuance Management Server and the Nuance Management

Console.

The settings for a product are only visible if the administrator has the “Manage” right for the particular product.

1. In the Sites area, click Organization Overview.

2. In the Sites area, click Details.

3. On the Organizations Details screen, click Products.

4. Set one or more of the following settings.

General

Institution code: The code for the transcription system used by the organization.

Nuance organization GUID: A single string of numbers and letters that Nuance assigns to you as a customer. The identifier is for your entire organization.

Nuance Management Server

You must have the 'Manage NMS' right to view and modify these settings.

NMC Inactivity timeout in __ minutes: The number of minutes the NMS waits before logging out an inactive administrator.

Configuring a site in your facility

A site represents a location on a server where you store user profiles. It typically corresponds to a physical location in your organization, such as an office or data center. An organization can contain multiple sites. The options that you choose for a site affect all user profiles stored in that location. .

To add a site to an organization

1. 1. In the Sites area, click Add. The Nuance Management Console displays the

Site screen.

2. Use the General tab to configure or view the following: l

Organization: View the name of the account associated with the site.

l

ID: Enter the unique identification number that you want to associate with the site. This field is required. When you create a site (Click Add in the

Sites area), the Nuance Management Console automatically creates a unique site ID and places it in the ID field. The ID is equal to the highest site

ID that exists in the organization plus one. You can edit the automatically generated site ID.

l

Name: Enter the name of the site. This field is required.

l

System Site Id: The system id for the site.

34


3. Use the Address tab to configure the following: l

Street 1: The first street address for the site.

l

Street 2: A second street address for the site.

l

Street 3: A third street address for the site.

l

City: The City associated with the site.

l

Zip: The zip code associated with the site.

l

Country: The country associated with the site.

5. Click Save to save the settings for this site. When you save the settings, the

Groups list becomes visible on the General tab. It is empty until you add

groups as members of the site. See Creating groups .

Setting miscellaneous site settings

1. At the top of the Nuance Management Console, in the Sites section, click Organization

Overview.

2. On the Manage Organization screen, in the navigation tree on the left-side of the screen, select a site.

3. In the Sites > Sites section, click Details.


5. Expand the Miscellaneous section: n

Prompt users to log out after __ minutes: The default is 30 minutes, the minimum is 5 minutes.

You can enter any value between 1 and 1440 minutes, but it should be long enough that Dragon will not think that the users have finished dictating when they are only pausing. When dictating, users should be warned not to pause for more than the number of seconds you configure here. At the end of their dictation, users must record silence for at least that number of seconds.

n

Log out users who do not respond after __ seconds: By default enabled, set to a value of 60 seconds, and applied to all users associated with the site that this user account is associated with.

The option instructs the Client to log out this user after the client has been idle and the user has been prompted to respond, but the number of seconds you indicate here elapses without a response.

The Log out users who do not respond after __ seconds: field accepts a numeric value (seconds) up to three characters in length.

n

Insert Text & Graphics command using __ : The default value is Type keys (

S HIFT + I NSERT ). The correct setting depends on the system that the user is dictating into. In most cases the default setting is sufficient.

This option enables the user to insert Text & Graphics command contents into the dictated document using one of the following: l

Type keys (Shift + Insert) l

Hook Paste

35

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide l

Simulate Keystrokes l

Type keys (CTRL+V) l

Type keys (Ctrl+V) SDK l

Use Windows Paste Command n

Disable automatic switching of dictation source to an available default: This is deselected by default.

If you select this option, the user will not automatically be switched to an available default dictation source if the currently configured source is unavailable.

n

Allow disconnected mode: For Dragon users that work off the network. Permits users to log on to a Dragon client when the workstation is not connected to the network, such as when the user is working off-site on a laptop, the network is down, or for some reason the roaming user profiles directory (where the Roaming User Profiles are stored) is unavailable.

If you choose to allow users to dictate in Disconnected mode, do not enable the

Remove local cache data after usage option in the Data settings for the site. If you enable both settings, when the user logs out after dictating in Disconnected mode, the results of the user's dictation end up being deleted from the local cache and all the work lost.

n

Suppress warning for using multicore speech profiles on single core

machines: Select to suppress the warning that displays if a user profile with a

BestMatch-IV or BestMatch-IV model loads on a single-core computer. This option is disabled by default.

Setting site Data storage settings

On the Dragon Professional tab, under Data, you can configure local and server data storage settings.

36


Store correction in archive

Enabled by default: When you elect this option, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional stores a list of corrections that the optimization uses in a local archive. If you do not select this option before you run the optimization, you may see a message that there is not enough data for the optimization to process. Be sure to select this option whenever you use Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional for an extended period of time.

__ (minutes) archive size

Set the archive size to control how many minutes of information is stored. The default setting is 180 minutes.

__ MB disk space reserved for playback

Adjusts the amount of disk cache space set aside for any overflow of dictation from a user's computer's memory (RAM). Increase the amount of disk space if you want to save more dictation data. If you do not want to keep any dictation (to conserve disk space) set the amount to 0 MB. The default is 100 MB.

Save recorded dictation with document __

Description

Automatically back up user profile every __ saves

Description

Don't back up user profile

Description

Create usability log

Instructs the software to create a log of all the menu commands, toolbar buttons, and voice commands that the users use during a Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional session.

This log can help technical support personnel solve software problems and should only be enabled if they instruct you to enable it. The Dragon client creates the usability log in:

C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Application

Data\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\DgnUsability.log

Remove local cache data after usage

By default, disabled at site level. Deletes the contents of the local cache when the user logs out. If you want to enable this option, you must disable the Allow disconnected mode option. Conversely, if you want to enable the Allow disconnected mode option, then you must disable this option to allow it to work. The effects of one setting cancel out the effects of the other.

Conserve server archive size

Off by default. Select this option to prevent the copying of Dragon Recorded Audio (.DRA) files (files that contain the acoustic data from the latest dictation session) to the Roaming

User Profile location when the program synchronizes the local cache user profile with the roaming user profile. If you leave this box unchecked, Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional integrates the local .DRA files with the roaming user profile when synchronizing it with the local cache.

37


The .DRA files are not copied once they grow to the maximum size you set in the __ MB disk

space reserved for network archive option.

__ MB disk space reserved for network archive

Description here.

Viewing, modifying, and deleting sites

Once you have created and configured a site, you can return to it at any time and perform the tasks below: To refresh the data on the Organizations screen, press Refresh at the bottom right of the screen.

Note: You must have appropriate NMC Administrator security rights to perform these tasks.

Finding and viewing a site

1. Select Organizations > Search.

2. Search for an organization.

3. Select an organization and click Manage.

4. In the left-side panel, select a site.

5. In the Site area, click Details.

6. To view the site details you can double-click the name of the site on the list.

7. The Site tab opens and displays all of the settings for the site on the General and

Address tabs.

38


Deleting a site

In the Nuance Management Console:

1. Remove any groups that are associated with the Site you will delete. See Viewing, modifying, and deleting groups for details.

2. Remove the users that are associated with the groups you deleted. See Viewing, modifying, and deleting user accounts

for details.

3. On the menu bar, Organizations > Search.

4. Search for and select an organization, and click Manage.

5. In the left-side panel, select a site.

6. On the ribbon, select Delete.

7. On the Confirm Site Deletion dialog box, click Yes.

Modifying a site

1. Find the site that you want to modify, using the procedure in Finding and viewing a

site above.

2. You can make changes depending on your security rights, detailed in Setting

Privileges for administrator groups on page 48.

Text boxes containing data that you cannot modify are gray to show they are inactive.

3. On the General tab, modify the ID and the Name.

o add groups to or remove groups from a site , see Creating groups .

4. Use the Address tab to configure the following: l

Street 1: The first street address for the site.

l

Street 2: A second street address for the site.

l

Street 3: A third street address for the site.

l

City: The City associated with the site.

l

Zip: The zip code associated with the site.

l

Country: The country associated with the site.

6. Click Save to save the settings for this site. When you save the settings, the Groups list becomes visible on the General tab. It is empty until you add groups as members

of the site. See Creating groups .

Creating Organization Tokens

Complete the following steps to create an organization token:

1. In the Nuance Management Console, go to Organizations > Search.

2. Search for and select an organization.

3. In the Organizations area, click the Details icon. The Organization Details screen appears.

4. In the Organization Tokens tab, click Add to generate a new organization token. The

39


Token field is pre-filled. Optionally, enter a value in the Comment field. Click Save.

5. The new token appears in the Token table. Copy or make a note of this value; you will need it to configure EHR Single Sign-On.

See Creating Active Directory Single Sign-On user accounts on page 18 for information

on using the tokens to configure EHR Single Sign-On.

40

Chapter 4: Configuring groups and user accounts

In the Nuance Management Console you can create groups of user accounts and associate them with the sites that you have created within your organization. This chapter describes how to set up and work with groups and user accounts, and explains how they work together.

Understanding groups

In the Nuance Management Console you can create groups of or administrator and associate them with the sites within your organization. Setting up groups makes it easier for you to manage the settings for large numbers of similar users. For instance, if you have a large group of Dragon

Client users , you can change a setting for one member of the group and quickly apply that change to all members of the group, rather than changing that settings for each userone at a time.

You use the Groups ribbon to: n

Create (add) and delete a group. n

Search for a group.

n

Add a user account to a group.

n

Access Group Details to configure, edit, copy, and delete a group.

When you first log in to the Nuance Management Console, it already contains groups that Nuance provides: n

NMC Administration

When you log in to the NMS Server for the first time, you used the default Admin user account, a member of the NMC Administration group.

Generating Types of Groups

All groups that you can create fall into two broad categories: n

Dragon Professional Author groups—Users who plan to dictate. Members of this type of group have access to the Dragon Client to dictate but do not need access to the Nuance

Management Console to make changes to the settings configured there.

41


NMC Administration groups—Network/system administrators who plan to configure the NMS Server and Dragon Clients for your sites. Members of this type of group have access to the Nuance Management Console to configure particular settings based on the Security Rights you assign them, but do not need access to the Dragon Client

because they are not dictating. (For more on administrator Security Rights, see Setting

Privileges for administrator groups on page 48

Depending on the needs of your organization you might want to create more groups, for example, a clinic might choose to create these groups: n

Two groups with the role of NMC Administrator, the first a small group who can change all options in the Nuance Management Console and the second a larger group of administrators who can change only group settings.

Your organization can have more than one type of administrator group. For instance, administrator level user groups that Nuance recommends you create: n

Super users—Who can take all types of actions in the NMS Server.

n

License administrators—Who create and grant/revoke licenses.

n

Group administrators—Who help decide on settings in their particular group need.

n

Help desk—Who might have only view access to the information in NMS Server to help them answer questions that arise.

Determining site or group settings for members of more than one site or group

Users can be members of multiple groups. Groups belong to one specific site. who are in more than one group can, logically, be subject to settings from several groups.

This situation raises the question of which site's or group's settings take precedence over those of the other sites or groups for the individual .

42


When group settings supersede those of other groups

n

If a provider's user account is a member of more than one group, the group that appears first in the User Account Details > Group Memberships > Selected

Groups list for that user account controls the settings that take effect for that provider. (See the illustration below.) n

You can reorganize the order of the groups in the list to put the correct group at the top.

Creating Groups

When you create a group, you configure the identifying information for the group and specify the group type.

Steps for creating a group

To create a group, you configure settings on the following tabs:

Details tab

1. On the menu bar, click Groups and then click the Add icon on the Groups ribbon.

The Add group dialog opens. The Base new group on what existing group? field lists all available groups for the current site.

2. In the Base new group on what existing group? field, select a group.

3. Press OK.

43


44

4. On the Group Details page, in the Details tab, in the Group name field, enter the name you want to assign to the group. The name is required. You must choose a unique name and Nuance recommends that you choose one that is immediately recognizable.

5. In the Sites field, associate the group with a site.

6. In the Role field, chose a role for the members of the group.

7. In the Privileges section, select the privileges for the group.

Grants tab

You can only configure grants for a group if you are using the NMC Administrator role. The Grants tab is where you view and control what an group members can create, view, edit, or delete. The Grants tab is also where you view and control the users, groups, and sites that group members can perform actions on.

The following are some examples of grants: l

Create Site: Allow an administrator to create a site in an organization.

l

View Site: Allow an administrator to view the sites in an organization.

l

Modify Site: Allow an administrator to modify the sites in an organization.

l

Delete Site: Allow an administrator to delete the sites in an organization.

To add a grant to a group:

1. In the Group Details screen, click the Grants tab.

2. Click Add.

3. On the Add Group Grant screen, in the Object Type area, select the object that the grant applies to: l

Organization l

Site l

Group l

Global

4. In the Grants area, select one or more grants. To select multiple grants, hold down the Ctrl key and select more than one grant. The grants you can select depend on the object you select in the Object Type area.

5. In the Object area, select one or more organizations, sites, or groups. Again, the type of object you can select depends on the object you select in the Object Type area. For example, if you select "Group" in the Object Type area, the Object area displays all the groups that you can apply grants to.

6. Click Add.

To delete a grant


2. In the Grants area, select a grant.


3. In the Delete column, click the red x.

Dragon Professional tab

1. Configure the Administrative settings: l

Disable the use of Advanced scripting commands:

Prevents group members from accessing Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional's Advanced scripting tools.

l

Create BM-IV profiles by default (recommended for virtualized envir-

onment): Selecting the Create BM-IV profiles by default (recommended for virtualized environment) option makes all users in a site use BestMatch IV acoustic models when they create a profile.

2. Configure the voice Commands that you want to be available to the members of

this group. For more information, see Setting Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional voice command options for user groups on page 100

3. Configure the Auto Formatting settings for the group to select the way that certain

words spoken by any member of the group should be formatted. See Setting Auto-

Formatting Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional options on page 82

Saving a group

After you have finished entering all the information necessary to define the group:

1. Click Save to save your settings and complete the configuration of the group.

2. You can later return to the group at any time to modify any settings, change sites the group belongs to, or add and remove user accounts from the group.

Steps for viewing or modifying a group

Details tab

1. In the Nuance Management Console, search for a group.

2. On the Groups screen, double-click a group or select a group and click Details.

3. On the Group Details screen, click the Details tab.

4. View or modify the following fields:

Group name - The name for the group. The name is required and must be a unique name.

Organization - The name of the organization. Nuance creates this name when it creates your organization.

Sites - The site that the group is associated with.

Role - The role for the members of the group.

45


46

Privileges - The privileges that are assigned to an administrator group. For

details, see Setting Privileges for groups .

Members tab

On the Members tab under Group Details, you can: n

Select individual user accounts to make those users members of the group. You can assign users to more than one group.

To add or remove users from a group

If a user is a member of only one group, you cannot delete the user from that group, because a user must belong to at least one group.

1. On the Group Details screen, click the Members tab.

2. A list of current group members (users) is displayed. The list of available users is constrained to users created manually or users that logged into Dragon and were assigned to the group

3. In the list of Group members, click on and highlight a user account, then click the

Add/Remove button below the list.

4. In the Group membership window:

1. To add someone to a group, in the Member column, check the checkbox beside their name.

2. To remove someone from a group, in the Member column, un-check the check-box beside their name.

5. Click Save.

Security tab

On the Security tab under Group Details, you can view the permissions that control the actions (create, view, edit, delete) that members of a group can perform on specific objects (sites, groups, and users).

To add a permission to a group

1. On the Group Details screen, click the Security tab.

2. Click Add.

3. In the Add Group Permission dialog-box, under Grants, select one or more grants. To select multiple grants, press down the Ctrl key and select more than one grant.

4. In the Groups area, apply the grant(s) to one or more groups.

5. Click Add.


Grants tab

You can only configure grants for a group if you are using the NMC

Administrator role. The Grants tab is where you view and control what an group members can create, view, edit, or delete. The Grants tab is also where you view and control the users, groups, and sites that group members can perform actions on.

The following are some examples of grants: l

Create Site: Allow an administrator to create a site in an organization.

l

View Site: Allow an administrator to view the sites in an organization.

l

Modify Site: Allow an administrator to modify the sites in an organization.

l

Delete Site: Allow an administrator to delete the sites in an organization.

To add a grant to a group:


2. Click Add.

3. On the Add Group Grant screen, in the Object Type area, select the object that the grant applies to: l

Organization l

Site l

Group l

Global

4. In the Grants area, select one or more grants. To select multiple grants, hold down the Ctrl key and select more than one grant. The grants you can select depend on the object you select in the Object Type area.

5. In the Object area, select one or more organizations, sites, or groups. Again, the type of object you can select depends on the object you select in the Object Type area. For example, if you select "Group" in the Object Type area, the Object area displays all the groups that you can apply grants to.

6. Click Add.

To delete a grant


2. In the Grants area, select a grant.

3. In the Delete column, click the red x.

Dragon Professional tab

1. View and configure the Administrative settings: l

Disable the use of Advanced scripting commands:

Prevents group members from accessing Dragon NaturallySpeaking

47


Professional's Advanced scripting tools.

l

Create BM-IV profiles by default (recommended for virtualized envir-

onment): Selecting the Create BM-IV profiles by default (recommended for virtualized environment) option makes all users in a site use BestMatch IV acoustic models when they create a profile.

2. View and configure the voice Commands that you want to be available to the

members of this group. For more information, see Setting Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional voice command options for user groups on page 100

3. View and configure the Auto Formatting settings for the group to select the way that certain words spoken by any member of the group should be formatted. This includes general and other settings that you want rendered consistently in documents

generated by the group. See Setting Auto-Formatting Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional options on page 82

Setting Privileges for administrator groups

Privileges control the rights for a specific product. Privileges determine the UI elements and features that an administrator can view and use in the Nuance Management Console.

Setting privileges for a group

1. 1. In the Nuance Management Console, search for a group.

2. 2. On the Groups screen, double-click the group or select the group, and in the Groups section, select Details.

3. 3. On the Group Details screen, in the Privileges area, select the privileges for the group.

The following are some of the privileges that an administrator can have:

48


Privilege

Manage

Organizations

Manage Sites

Manage Groups

Manage Licenses

Send Message

View Trends

Product Manage

NMS

Product Manage

<Product>

Description

View, edit, or delete organizations.

View, edit, or delete sites.

View, edit, or delete groups.

View, grant, and revoke licenses, and receive notifications when licenses are about to expire.

Send messages to a user, administrator, site, or group.

View client device usage information, speech recognition metrics, and license usage.

Configure settings for the

Nuance

Management

Server.

Configure settings for a product. For example, DM360

Network Edition or Dragon

Professional.

When you create a group and select the role of NMC Administrator for members of the group to give those members access to the Nuance Management Console, the Security

Rights list becomes available.

49


You now give security rights to the members of the group to further delineate exactly what the group members can do when they access the console.

The group's rights can restrict members to only viewing information created by others, or can extend right to add and delete some types of information but not fir other types, and—at the other end of the spectrum—can cover taking virtually any action in the console.

Group rights determine what an administrator can see and do in the Nuance Management

Console. When you log into the NMS, the NMS sends the Nuance Management Console a set of flags that are based on your group rights. These flags determine the actions you can perform and the Nuance Management Console UI elements you can see and interact with.

This applies to working with Accounts, groups, and sites. You can now assign Access rules to the members of the group to further delineate exactly what organizations, sites and groups they can access through the console. By default, a group has access to all sites and groups in their organization.

As you plan your network configuration, you need to plan out the group security rights assignments. Before you proceed, decide which security rights to assign to each group, using the security rights options for members of the NMC Administrator groups. A subset of those options are shown in the table that follows.

50


Security Rights

Organization - View organizations

Group members can:

View only the organization where the administrator's own user account was created.

Organization - Able to edit an existing organization

Edit an existing organization.

Organization - Able to delete organizations

Organization - Create system

Organization - Modify system

Organization - Delete system

Organization - Create domain

Organization - Modify domain

Organization - Delete domain

Site - View sites

Delete an organization.

Create a system.

Modify a system.

Delete a system.

Create a domain.

Modify a domain.

Delete a domain.

View the sites that have groups the administrator belongs to as a member.

Site - Able to create new sites Create new sites for all organizations that the administrator can access.

Site - Able to modify existing sites

Site - Able to delete sites

Group - View groups

Group - Able to create new groups

Group - Able to edit existing groups

Group - Able to delete groups

Modify sites for any organization that the administrator can access.

Delete sites for any organization that the administrator can access.

View all groups that the administrator has been assigned to as a member.

Create new groups in the NMS

Server organization that the administrator has access to.

Edit groups that already exist in the

NMS Server organization that the administrator has access to.

Delete groups from the NMS Server organization that the administrator has access to.

51


Security Rights

User Account - View user accounts


View accounts for all users who are in the same groups as the administrator.

User Account - Able to create a new user account

Create a new user account.

User Account - Able to edit an existing user account

Edit an existing user account.

User Account -

Able to enroll user accounts in groups

Create group members by placing user accounts in groups.

User Account - Able to delete user accounts

Delete an existing user account.

Licensing - Able to view licenses View existing licenses.

Licensing - Able to grant licenses Grant licenses to users.

Licensing - Able to revoke licenses

Revoke licenses from users.

Licensing - Notified when licenses are expiring

Receive notifications when licenses are about to expire.

Dragon - Able to view Profile

Optimizer status


Optimizer task failure.

(Only for the DNS Professional product) - View Profile Optimizer

Speech Node status using the

Profile Optimizer Status utility.

(Only for the DNS Professional product) - View information about task failures in the Profile

Optimizer Tasks screen.


Optimizer tasks

Dragon - Able to execute

ACO/LMO for a user

Miscellaneous - Able to view downloaded packages

(Only for the DNS Professional product) - Access the Profile

Optimizer Tasks utility.

(Only for the DNS Professional product) - Use the User Profile

Association utility.

(Only for the DNS Professional product) - View update packages downloaded from the NuanceLink using the Messages utility.

52


Security Rights

Miscellaneous - Able to approve downloaded packages


(Only for the DNS Professional product) - NMS Server automatically downloads periodic medication and command updates for Dragon

Medical Client and sends a message that the package has been downloaded but requires approval to install. Once users with this right approve this package in the

Approval utility, the NMS Server initiates the process of adding the medication or command update to the appropriate language models.

The integration and distribution of changes is actually handled by the

Profile Optimizer and its

Speech Nodes.

Viewing, modifying, and deleting groups

Once you have created and configured a group you can return to it at any time and perform the tasks below.

Note: You must have the appropriate NMC Administrator security rights to perform these tasks.

Finding and viewing a group

1. On the menu bar, click Groups and then click the Search icon. The Groups screen opens, allowing you to search by Group name, Organization, or Role.

2. Enter a group name in the Group name field, and/or select an organization or role to search on, then click the magnifying glass.

3. The search results appear on the Groups screen.

4. Click on the name of the group that you want to view.

The Group Details window opens and displays all of the settings for the group on various tabs.

53


Deleting a group

1. On the menu bar, click Groups and then click the Search icon.

The Groups screen opens. To refresh the data on the Groups screen, press

Refresh at the bottom right of the screen.

2. Use the procedure in Finding and viewing a Group to find the group you want to delete.

3. Select the group that you want to delete from the list and then click Delete on the

Groups ribbon.

A message asks you to confirm that you want to delete the group.

4. Click Yes.

The group is removed from the system. User accounts associated with the group are not deleted. However, you should make sure to reassign the user accounts to other groups.

Modifying a group

1. Use the procedure in Finding and viewing a Group to find the group you want to modify.

2. The changes you can make to a group depend on your security rights.

Fields that you cannot modify are shaded gray and are inactive.

3. On the Members tab, you can: l

Add or remove group members (user accounts)

7. When your modifications are complete, click Save to apply them to the group.

Setting Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional voice command options for user groups

Under Group Details > Dragon Professional > Commands, you set voice command options that control how Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional interprets voice commands.

Once you configure commands for a group, the command settings apply to all users in the group. n

Enable mouse motion commands: By default, this feature is enabled. Allows the user to use mouse motion commands such as "Move Mouse left," "Faster," and

"Slower." Use the Mouse movement slider to control how quickly the mouse pointer moves across the screen.

n

Enable HTML support: By default, the group level setting applies.

Enabling this setting makes available a set of commands designed to help users surf the web by voice in web browsers. You may need to disable this setting for certain applications. For more information, see the client Help.

54

Chapter 4: Configuring groups and user accounts n

Enable commands in HTML windows: By default the group level setting applies.

Enabling this option makes available a set of voice commands designed for users to use for creating or editing messages in HTML format in certain Microsoft Outlook dialog boxes. These dialog boxes appear with the Internet Explorer symbol (a small document icon with the letter "e" in it) in the left corner of the window header. You may need to disable this setting for certain applications. For more information, see the Client Help.

n

Enable automatically select first field:

Select this option to disable the "automatically select the first field" feature for a group of users.

n

Require click to select hyperlinks in HTML windows: By default, this feature is enabled and the group level setting applies.

n

Requires that the user speak the word "Click" to select a hyperlink, such as "Click nuance.com" instead of just "nuance.com." n

Enable recognition mode switching commands: Enabling recognition mode switching allows users in the group to dictate and say the mode switching commands interchangeably. Turning off recognition mode switching disables the ability to switch between modes. For example: l

Dictation Mode: In Dictation Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional interprets everything you say as dictation and nothing is interpreted as a command. Say

"Start Dictation Mode" or "Switch to Dictation Mode." l

Command Mode: In Command Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional interprets everything you say as a command and nothing is interpreted as dictated text.

Say "Start Command Mode" or "Switch to Command Mode." l

Spell Mode: In Spell Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional allows you to say any combination of letters, digits, or symbols as you might need to do dictating license plate or parts numbers. Say "Start Spell Mode" or "Switch to Spell Mode." l

Numbers Mode: In Numbers Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional interprets your dictation as numbers. Say "Start Numbers Mode" or "Switch to Numbers

Mode." l

Normal Mode: The most flexible mode in Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional is Normal Mode. In Normal Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional distinguishes dictation from commands by analyzing what you say between pauses.

Say "Start Normal Mode" or "Switch to Normal Mode."

For more information on modes, see the Client Help.

n

Enable web search commands: Select this option to make available Web search commands that let users in the group search the Internet using commands that are patterned on their natural speech. See Voice Shortcuts for Web Search in the Client

Help for more information.

n

Enable desktop search commands: Select this option to make available Desktop search commands that let users in the group search their Windows desktops using commands that are patterned on their natural speech. See Voice Shortcuts for

Desktop Search in the Client Help for more information.

n

Enable Email and Calendar commands: Select this option to make available

Voice Shortcuts for Email and Calendar that let users in the group control Outlook's

55

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide email and calendar functions using commands that are patterned on their normal speech. See the Client Help for more information.

n

Enable cut shortcut commands, Enable delete shortcut commands, Enable

copy shortcut commands: Select these options to enable the Cut, Copy and

Delete Quick Voice Formatting Commands. Delete and Copy are enabled by default.

n

Variable delimiters: By default the group level setting applies.

The variable delimiters are used by Text and Graphics/auto-text commands that incorporate Voice (variable) Fields. Voice Fields are variable fields where the user can later type or dictate a specific value.

By default, Text and Graphics/auto-text Voice commands use the square bracket [ ] characters to indicate the presence of a variable field. To change the variable delimiting characters, specify a character for the left and right delimiters.

The delimiting "characters" can each be up to 5 characters long. The left and right delimiters cannot be exactly the same as each other or, when you try to apply them, the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional displays a message that they are not valid.

Caution: Nuance recommends you set the delimiting characters once and never change them, because if, for instance, you use square brackets in several Text and Graphics/auto-text commands, then change the delimiting characters to */ and /*, the Text and Graphics/auto-text commands that are using the square brackets then fail because the Client looks for variables only between */ and /*, not between [ and ].

For more information about using variables with Text and Graphics/auto-text commands, see the Client Help.

n

Enable natural language commands: This series of four options enables the users in the group to use Natural Language commands with the applications

Microsoft Word, WordPerfect, Microsoft Excel, and Microsoft PowerPoint. This feature uses an additional 8 MB of memory and requires that you restart your computer before it takes effect. Natural Language Commands are available by default only in Microsoft Word.

Enable Facebook post commands: Enable this option to use commands that work with Facebook.

Enable Twitter post commands: Enable this option to use commands that work with Twitter.

Creating user accounts

To create a user account in the Nuance Management Console, you configure the basic settings in the User Account Details window.

56


Creating a user account

1. On the menu bar, click User Accounts and then click the Add icon on the User

Accounts ribbon.

The User Account Details window opens.

2. Configure the options and settings on tabs in the User Account Details window: l

Details and Address. l

Messaging. See Send a message to a user for details.

3. Click Save to save the user account settings.

You are prompted to grant the new user a license.

4. Click Yes to assign a license to the user account. Click No to create the user without a license and remain on the New User tab.

5. If you click Yes, a message prompts you to select the type of license that you want to assign to the user account.

6. Select the license type for the user account and click OK. (The number in parentheses indicates how many licenses of that type are still available.)

Configuring user accounts

Before users at your facility can begin using Dragon Client, you must create a user account for each professional in the NMS Server, through the Nuance Management Console. When one of these end users opens the Dragon Client, the server checks to make sure that the userhas an account and a license associated with the account. After verifying the account and license, the server checks the roaming user profiles Server to find a user profile for that

user(for more information, see Creating a user profile on page 108

57


A user profile stores acoustic information about the voice of the individual provider. Dragon

Client uses this vocal data to help it recognize what the useris saying.

If the user does not have a user profile, Dragon Client opens the New Profile Wizard, where the user enters basic data, selects a medical vocabulary, and presses a button to have the client create a user profile. If a user profile exists, the Dragon Client accesses that profile and the user can begin dictating. If the provider's user profile is not associated with a valid account or the account does not have a license assigned to it, the user cannot use that profile to dictate.

The NMS Server lets you select the default language and accent that apply to creating a user profile, though the user can change these settings in the wizard.

You can add or delete user accounts on the User Accounts ribbon. You can use this ribbon to modify existing user accounts and to edit their settings at any time. If you have the required security settings, you can also view the Dragon Client logs through the DM360 Network

Edition Client Logs icon on the ribbon.

In DNS Professional, you can use a text file to import multiple users into an existing group.

You can also set the user account type and apply a license to each of the users you import.

For details, see Import multiple users into the NMS server on page 63 .

Note: If you delete a user account, you can reassign the license associated with it to another

user account. See Managing licenses on page 91

.

When you create user accounts, keep in mind: n

If a user account is a member of more than one group, you should be sure that the group whose settings you want to take precedence appears first in the Group

Memberships > Selected Groups list for the user account.

n

In most organizations, users should only be members of multiple groups because they use both the Dragon Client and the Nuance Management Console. In this instance, the person would be both a healthcare user and an administrator.

n

Although it is less common, some users might belong to multiple groups.

Configuring user account details and address settings

On the User Account Details > Details and Address tabs, you store contact, identification, and login credentials for a user account.

1. The Details tab displays the Organization associated with the user account that you are creating.

2. Enter the information for the user associated with the user account. The First Name, Last

Name, and Login are required. The Login must be unique.

The first name, last name, and login must be the same as the first name, last name, and login for the user in the back end system. If the login ID already exists, “Login unavailable” appears in red under the Login field.

3. In the Middle name field, enter the middle name of the user.

4. In the Prefix field, enter a prefix to be placed before the user name.

58


5. Enter the Password. You should always follow Microsoft's strong password guidelines or have similar organizational guidelines for ensuring passwords are not easy to guess.

For more details about setting options for passwords, see Setting user password settings.

6. Enter the Location (usually the primary work site) and the Department of the user.

7. Click the Address tab and enter the home address information of the user associated with the account. This information is optional and is for your own convenience only, as the

NMS Server does not use it.

9. Continue to create the user account on the Group

Memberships tab. See Assigning user accounts to groups on page 62.

10. To send email or a text message to the user when they receive an NMS message, set the

options in the Messaging tab. See Enable sending messages to an administrator on page 60

Administrators can send messages to other administrators

An administrator can send messages to contacts in an organization. Organizations and their administrators can receive notifications about events including system upgrades, outages, notices, news, etc.

The administrator sets up an email address for an organization. The administrator also sets up an email address for the following Nuance Management Console Users: n

All users with an NMC Administration license that are in the NMC Administrator group (assuming NMC Administration licenses have been imported for that organization).

n

All NMC Administrator groups (assuming NMC Administration licenses have been imported for that organization).

Afterwards, the administrator can send NMS messages to NMS users (by licenses, group, or user accounts) and can send emails to organization(s).

Messages can be sent to one or more sites or Nuance Management Console users in one step, even if they are from different organizations.

Messages may be sent for a variety of reasons, including: n a user has an NMS message n there are medication and command updates that require approvals

59

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide n a new patch is available for deployment n a new NMS patch is available for deployment n the number of available licenses is low n scheduled “trend” reports are available n troubleshooting information is required by support personnel.

n system maintenance or outages are planned.

n other news or events

Enable sending messages to an administrator

You can configure the Nuance Management Server (NMS) to send email messages and

SMS messages to administrators when they receive a message from the NMS. You can enable email messaging, SMS messaging, or both when you create a user or after you create a user.

Enable sending email to an administrator when they receive an NMS message

To send an email to an administrator when they receive an NMS message, perform the following steps:

1. On the User Account Details screen, click the Messaging tab.

2. In the Email section, select Inform me via email when I receive NMS messages. If you select this option, you must enter an email address in the Email field to be able to save the administrator.

3. In the Email field, enter an email address for the administrator.

60

4. To save the changes and close the administrator, click Save. To save the changes and edit another administrator, click Save & New.

Enable sending an SMS message to an administrator's phone when they receive an NMS message

To send an SMS message to an administrator's mobile phone when they receive an NMS message, perform the following steps:


1. On the User Account Details screen, click the Messaging tab.

2. In the Mobile Phone section, select Inform me via SMS when I receive

NMS messages. If you select this option, you must enter values in the Mobile Phone field and the Mobile Phone Provider field to be able to save the administrator.

.

3. In the Mobile Phone field, enter the mobile phone number for the administrator.

4. In the Mobile Phone Provider drop-down field, select the administrator's mobile provider.

The following is the current list of supported mobile : l

Alltel l

AT&T l

Boost Mobile l

Sprint Nextel l

Sprint PCS

61


T-Mobile l

US Cellular l

Verizon l

Virgin Mobile USA

5. In the Message Delivery Type, choose the message delivery type:

i. To include the body of the message in the email or SMS message, select Include the mes-

sage body in the delivery (default).

ii. To have the email or SMS message only inform the recipient that they have an

NMS message, select Simply inform me that I have a message; I will retrieve it

myself.

6. To save the changes and close the administrator, click Save. To save the changes and edit another administrator, click Save & New.

Assigning user accounts to groups

Use the User Account Details > Group Memberships tab to make a user account a member of one or more groups by indicating group memberships for the user account.

Use the Site filter drop down to choose the appropriate site for the user.

The Available Groups list displays all available groups for the selected site.

Notes: n

You must assign each user account to at least one group. If you do not assign a user account to a group, the NMS Server does not let you save the user account.

n

If a user account is a member of more than one group, the group whose settings take precedence over settings of other groups appears first in the User Account Details >

Group Memberships > Selected Groups list for that user account. n

You can use the Available groups filter drop-down list to refine the list of groups that display in the User Account Details page.

n

User accounts can only be added to groups by someone who is an

NMC Administrator with the appropriate security rights. If you want users in your organization to be able to assign themselves to groups, you must create a group with the appropriate rights and add those users to the group.

Assigning a user account to a group

1. On the User Account Details screen, click Group Memberships.

2. In the Available Groups area, select a group name.

3. Click the right arrow button to move your selection to the Selected Groups area.

4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the user account is assigned to all of the groups that you require.

5. Click Save to save your selections.

Removing a user account from a group

There are two ways to remove a user account from a group:

62


In the User Account Details > Group Memberships tab, select the group that you want to remove the user account from and click the left arrow button. The group is removed from the Selected Groups area.

n

In the Group Details > Members tab click the Add/Remove button under the

Group members list. Use the Group Membership - User Accounts window to select the name of the user account from the Selected User Accounts list and move it to the Available User Accounts list using the left arrow button.

Configuring Users for Active Directory Authentication

Complete the following steps for each user you want to configure for Active Directory authentication.

Note: You can also import users and their domains and usernames in bulk. For details, see

Import multiple users into the NMS server

in the Nuance Management Console Help.

1. Under User Accounts, click Search. Search for and double-click a user.

2. In the Credentials tab, click the NTLM tab, and click Add to add a new domain mapping. The New Credential dialog appears:

3. The User Name and Organization Name are already filled out. Use the Domain drop down to choose the user's domain, and enter her LDAP login for that domain in the Login field.

4. Click OK to save your changes.

Import multiple users into the NMS server

In Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional, you can use the Import Users wizard to import multiple users at one time into the system. You can also assign user account types and licenses to the users and assign the users to specific Groups.

To perform a mass import of users, you must perform the following two main tasks:

1. Create a comma-delimited text file or an XML file that contains information about the users, including user names and passwords.

2. Use the file to import users into the Nuance Management Server.

63


Creating a file with information about users to import

To import multiple users into the Nuance Management Server (NMS) , you must create either a comma-delimited text file or an XML file that contains user information. The Import Users wizard supports both file types. However, each file must conform to specific formatting standards.

Creating a comma-delimited text file for importing users

The comma-delimited text file can contain the following fields for each user: n

First name (50 characters maximum) n

Last name (50 characters maximum) n

Login id (30 characters maximum) n

Password (30 characters maximum)

The fields must be separated by commas. The First name, Last name, and Login id fields must contain characters. The Password field can be blank.

Example: A comma-delimited text file with user information

The following is an example of a valid text file containing user information.

Notice there is no password in the second example. When importing a comma-delimited file, if the password is blank, you must still place a comma after the login id field and leave the password field blank. The NMS expects four fields in the text file.

Jack, Degnan, jdegnan, pwd124

Tim, Roberts, troberts,

Frank, Fiddler, ffiddler, fflr2

Creating an XML file for importing users

The XML file must begin with the XML version declaration processing instruction, <?xml version="1.0"... ?>.

The XML file can contain the following fields for each user. The fields can contain commas.

n

First name (required: 1 character minimum, 50 characters maximum) n

Last name (required: 1 character minimum, 50 characters maximum) n

Middle name (50 characters maximum) n

Prefix (10 characters maximum) n

Login id (required: 3 characters minimum, 30 characters maximum) n

Password (required: 30 characters maximum) n

Location (50 characters maximum) n

Department (50 characters maximum) n

Email address (50 characters maximum) n

Street 1 (60 characters maximum) n

Street 2 (60 characters maximum) n

Street 3 (60 characters maximum)

64


City (40 characters maximum) n

State (5 characters maximum) n

ZipCode (20 characters maximum) n

NTLMCredential (160 characters maximum) Syntax:

<NTLMCredential><DomainName>\<UserName></NTLMCredential>

Note: The NTLM Credential element allows you to import a user's domain and user name pair for multi-domain LDAP. For this import to work, you must create an Active Directory connection string entry for each unique DomainName that you specify in the

NTLMCredential element before you run the import. For example if you support two domains, Domain1 and Domain2, you must create an Active Directory connection string entry for each of these domains before you can do a bulk import of users on either domain.

Example: An XML file with user information

The following is an example of a valid XML file containing user information:

65


If the user import field is not required, you can omit the attribute. The attributes can be placed in any order in the XML file. The Users and User elements are in the following default XML name space: http://nuance.com/NAS/UserImport

Importing users into the Nuance Management Server

After you create a comma-delimited text file or an XML file that contains user information, you must use the file and the Nuance Management Console to import users into the system.

At any time in the following steps, you can press Cancel to exit a step and stop the import process. You can also click the left arrow button to return to the previous screen in the Import

Users wizard.

1. In the Nuance Management Console, select the User Accounts tab.

2. Select Import. The Import Users wizard appears.

3. In the Select a File To Import screen, enter the path and name of the file that contains the user information. If for any reason you decide to not import the users, press Cancel.

66

4. If the path and name of the text file are valid, the Next button is enabled. Press Next. If the

Import Users wizard has trouble parsing the data from the text file or simply cannot find any users in the text file, the wizard displays a message that tells you no users were found.

Press OK to close the message. You may now re-enter the name of the text file or make changes to the existing text file and retry this step.

5. The Users to Import screen displays information about the users from the text file.

6. Review the list of users to import. Press Next to continue. If you wish to cancel the import of users, press Cancel. To return to the previous page, click the left arrow button.


If the Import Users wizard encounters errors when importing the user data, the Nuance

Management Console displays a message. Press Close on the dialog to leave this step.

7. On the Select an Organization screen, select the organization to associate with the users.

8. Press Next.

9. The Select Group Membership screen displays a list of groups that you can associate with the users. The left side of the Available Groups page displays all available groups for the current organization and the site in the Select Site field.

67


10. In Available Groups, select one or more groups. Use the arrows to move the selected groups to the Selected Groups list. You must select at least one group.

68

11. Press Next.

12. If you have the administrative rights to grant licenses to users, the Import Users wizard displays the Select Licenses screen. The screen lists all the licenses that you can grant to the users. The list displays the license type and the number of available licenses for each license type.

You cannot apply a license type to the users if the number of available licenses is less than the number of users In this case, the license type is disabled and you cannot select it in the screen.

13. Optional: Select the licenses to apply to the users. Press Next.


14. In the Ready to Import screen, press Next to start importing the users.

15. The Import Users wizard displays the Performing Import screen and starts to import the users. A progress indicator displays the status of the import process. When the wizard fin-

69

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide ishes importing all the users, press Next.

70

16. The Import Results screen displays a list of all the users that the Import Users wizard imported into the system. If the wizard could not import a user, the Import Results screen displays information about why the user was not imported.

17. Press Finish.

XML schema for the user XML import file

The following schema defines the file format for any XML file that contains user information for importing users into the system.

id="UserImportSchema"

targetNamespace="http://nuance.com/NAS/UserImport"

elementFormDefault="qualified"

xmlns="http://nuance.com/NAS/UserImport"

xmlns:mstns="http://nuance.com/NAS/UserImport"


xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" >



<xs:elementname="Users"type="Users">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>A collection of users to import</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>

</xs:element>



<xs:complexTypename="Users">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>This types defines the user collection</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>

<xs:sequence>

<xs:elementname="User"type="User"minOccurs="1"maxOccurs="unbounded">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>One of more users to import</xs:documentation>

71


</xs:annotation>

</xs:element>

</xs:sequence>

</xs:complexType>



<xs:complexTypename="User">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>This type defines the basic user information that can be imported</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>

<xs:attributename="LastName"type="NameString"use="required"/>

<xs:attributename="FirstName"type="NameString"use="required"/>

<xs:attributename="MiddleName"type="NameString" />

<xs:attributename="Prefix"type="PrefixString"/>

<xs:attributename="LoginId"type="LoginIdString"use="required"/>

<xs:attributename="Password"type="PasswordString"use="required"/>

<xs:attributename="Location"type="GeneralInfoString" />

<xs:attributename="Department"type="GeneralInfoString"/>

72


<xs:attributename="EmailAddress"type="GeneralInfoString"/>

<xs:attributename="Street1"type="StreetAddressString"/>



<xs:attributename="City"type="CityString"/>

<xs:attributename="State"type="StateString"/>

<xs:attributename="ZipCode"type="ZipString"/>

</xs:complexType>



<xs:simpleTypename="NameString">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>A general string from names (50 characters maximum)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>

<xs:restrictionbase="xs:string">

<xs:minLengthvalue="1"/>

<xs:maxLengthvalue="50"/>

</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>

73




<xs:simpleTypename="LoginIdString">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>A string that contains the user's login id (30 characters maximum)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>


<xs:minLengthvalue="3"/>


</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>



<xs:simpleTypename="PasswordString">

<xs:annotation>

< xs:documentation>A string for the user's login password (30 characters maximum)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>



74


</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>



<xs:simpleTypename="PrefixString">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>A user name prefix (10 characters maximum)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>



</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>



<xs:simpleTypename="GeneralInfoString">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>A general information string (50 characters maximum)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>


75


<xs:maxLengthvalue="50" />

</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>



<xs:simpleTypename="StreetAddressString">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>A street address string (60 characters maximum)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>



</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>



<xs:simpleTypename="CityString">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>A city string (40 characters maximum)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>

76




</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>



<xs:simpleTypename="StateString">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>A state string (5 characters maximum)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>



</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>



<xs:simpleTypename="ZipString">

<xs:annotation>

77


<xs:documentation>A zip code string (20 characters maximum)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>



</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>

<!— -NTLM Credential String -->

<xs:simpleType name="NTLMCredentialString">

<xs:annotation>

<xs:documentation>A NTLM Credential string (160 characters max)</xs:documentation>

</xs:annotation>

<xs:restriction base="xs:string">

<xs:maxLength value="160"/>

</xs:restriction>

</xs:simpleType>

</xs:schema>

Setting user account Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional client options

On the User Account Details > Dragon Professional > User Account Options tab, you can configure settings for the individual user that override settings that you already selected for the group.

78


Setting User Account options

By default, settings are configured at the group level and the Group option to the right of a setting is selected. To override the group settings, select the Personal option next to a setting.

n



n


Enabling this option makes available a set of voice commands designed for users to use for creating or editing messages in HTML format in certain Microsoft

Outlook dialog boxes. These dialog boxes appear with the Internet Explorer symbol (a small document icon with the letter "e" in it) in the left corner of the window header. You may need to disable this setting for certain applications. For more information, see the Client Help.

n

Require click to select hyperlinks in HTML windows: By default the group level setting applies.

If you select this option, it requires that the user speak the word "Click" to select a hyperlink, such as "Click nuance.com" instead of just "nuance.com." You may need to disable this setting for certain applications.

n


Select this option to disable the "automatically select the first field" feature for a user or a group of users.

n

Variable delimiters: By default the group level setting applies. Usually you do not change delimiters for an indivudal user because they are most effective when they apply across an entire group's documents.

l

Variable delimiters in templates (Text & Graphics commands that incorporate voice (variable) fields), are characters that surround each voice field location in the template/command where the user can later type or dictate a specific value. l

By default, a pair of square brackets [ ] indicates the presence of a voice field.

To use different characters to indicate a voice field, enter the characters you prefer to use for left and right delimiters. l

Delimiting "characters" can each be up to 5 characters long. The left and right delimiters cannot be exactly the same as each other or, when you try to apply them, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional displays a message that they are not valid. n

Saving the user also saves local acoustics: By default the site level setting applies.

79


Select this option to save the user's acoustic information locally on the client. By saving the acoustic information, any corrections the user makes are available even after a close and re-open of the user profile. In addition, selecting this option synchronizes all corrections in the Local cache user profile with the roaming user profiles if you also turned on the Always copy acoustic information to

network option at the site level (active by default).




n

The number of seconds that the client remains idle before

prompting a user is based on the number of seconds set in the

Miscellaneous settings for the site in Prompt users to log off

after __ minutes:. You cannot change that setting for individual users.

The number of seconds the client can be idle before prompting a user to log off always applies to all users across the entire site.

n

Remove local cache data after usage: By default the site level setting applies.

Deletes the contents of the local cache when the user logs out.

Note: If you want to enable this option, you must disable the Allow

disconnected mode option in the Site > Roaming user profile settings to allow it to work. Conversely, if you want to enable the Allow disconnected

mode option, you must disable this option to allow it to work. The effects of one setting cancel out the effects of the other.

n

Save user profiles upon automatic logout: n

Enable recognition mode switching commands: Enabling recognition mode switching allows users in the group to dictate and say the mode switching commands interchangeably. Turning off recognition mode switching disables the ability to switch between modes. For example: n l

Dictation Mode: In Dictation Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional interprets everything you say as dictation and nothing is interpreted as a command. Say "Start Dictation Mode" or "Switch to Dictation Mode." l

Command Mode: In Command Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional interprets everything you say as a command and nothing is interpreted as dictated text. Say "Start Command Mode" or

"Switch to Command Mode." l

Spell Mode: In Spell Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Pro-

fessional allows you to say any combination of letters, digits, or sym-

80

Chapter 4: Configuring groups and user accounts bols as you might need to do dictating license plate or parts numbers. Say "Start Spell Mode" or "Switch to Spell Mode." l

Numbers Mode: In Numbers Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional interprets your dictation as numbers. Say "Start Numbers Mode" or "Switch to Numbers Mode." l

Normal Mode: The most flexible mode in Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional is Normal Mode. In Normal

Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional distinguishes dictation from commands by analyzing what you say between pauses. Say "Start Normal Mode" or "Switch to Normal Mode."


n

Enable web search commands: Select this option to make available Web search commands that let users in the group search the Internet using commands that are patterned on their natural speech. See Voice Shortcuts for Web Search in the Client Help for more information.

n

Enable desktop search commands: Select this option to make available

Desktop search commands that let users in the group search their Windows desktops using commands that are patterned on their natural speech. See Voice

Shortcuts for Desktop Search in the Client Help for more information.

n

Enable Email and Calendar commands: Select this option to make available

Voice Shortcuts for Email and Calendar that let users in the group control

Outlook's email and calendar functions using commands that are patterned on their normal speech. See the Client Help for more information.

n

Enable cut shortcut commands, Enable delete shortcut commands,

Enable copy shortcut commands: Select these options to enable the Cut,

Copy and Delete Quick Voice Formatting Commands. Delete and Copy are enabled by default.

n



n

Enable Facebook post commands: n

Enable Twitter post commands: n

Upload dictation data to Nuance for research purposes: By default the

Organization level setting applies.

Select this option to automatically upload data from a user's dictation and user profile to Nuance so that the company can improve future versions of the product and further enhance speech recognition technology. You might want to turn on this option for a user whose dictation is particularly difficult to recognize.

81


Setting Auto-Formatting Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional options

You use the Auto-Formatting options to set up text formatting that Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional Clients automatically apply to all user dictation, producing consistently formatted reports across the entire organization. Changing these options for a group affects all members of that group exclusively. Customizing the options for a single user's user account affects only that user's dictation.

The Auto-Formatting options activate different forms of automatic formatting. The automatic formats let users dictate in a natural way and also dictate different types of word formats, such as abbreviations, contractions, and e-mail addresses.

These formats do not have the last say on punctuation of numbers and currency; instead, numeric punctuation is ultimately controlled by settings on the Regional Options tab of the

Windows Control Panel Regional and Language Options dialog box. (Although the numeric formats are usually standard for the country shown in that dialog box, you can click the Customize... button to find tabs for Numbers and Currency to customize the formats.)

NMS Server administrators set General formatting options on the Group Details > Dragon

Professional tab. However, users can choose to override Auto-Formatting settings that apply to the documents that result from their dictation.

For more information on how the Auto-Formatting option settings are stored and whose

setting of them takes precedence, refer to Setting general auto-formatting options in the client

or the Nuance Management Server on page 168 .

Setting Auto-Formatting options

On the Group Details > Dragon Professional tab, expand the Auto-Formatting section.

n

Abbreviate common English units of measure: Enabled by default.

Automatically inserts abbreviations for units of measure. For example, "mm" for

"millimeter".

n

Abbreviate titles: Enabled by default. Inserts abbreviated versions of any title in the default lexicon. For example, "Mr." instead of "Mister." n

Allow pauses in formatted phrases: Enabled by default. Lets number and phrase formatting work together if you pause while speaking a number.

n

Automatically add commas and periods: Disabled by default. Automatically adds commas and periods based on pause length and sentence structure.

n

Caps Lock key overrides capitalization commands: Disabled by default.

When this option is enabled and the keyboard Caps Lock key is active, several

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional capitalization commands are not active:

"Cap <word>", "Caps On", "Caps Off" "All-Caps <word>", "All-Caps On", "All-

Caps Off", "No-Caps <word>", "No-Caps On", and "No-Caps Off". n

Expand common English contractions: Disabled by default. Enables Dragon

82


NaturallySpeaking Professional to recognize contractions while transcribing dictation. If you clear this box, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional transcribes spoken contractions in a more formal manner. For example, if you say "Don't go near the water," Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional transcribes "Do not go near the water."

In some situations, the formal expression of a contraction might be ambiguous.

For example, the phrase "It's always" could either mean "It is always" or "It has always" depending on the tense of the verb that follows. In this situation, Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional always expands the contraction, regardless of how this option is set.

n

Format ISO currency codes: Disabled by default. Inserts currency codes rather than currency symbols. For example, "USD10.00" instead of "10 dollars," or

"EUR50,00" instead of "50 euros." n

Format other numbers: Enabled by default. Inserts properly formatted decimals, negative numbers, and fractions. For example, "-1" instead of "negative

1." n

Format phone numbers: Enabled by default. Turns on automatic formatting of

US telephone numbers when you speak a sequence of seven or ten numbers. For example, if you say "7815551234", Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional will transcribe "781-555-1234." n

Format prices: Enabled by default. Inserts prices and currencies in the proper format with the appropriate currency symbol. For example, "$10.00" instead of "10 dollars," or " 50,00" instead of "50 euros." n

Format street addresses: Enabled by default. Inserts a properly formatted street address. For example:

“One seventy West one hundred south number fifty Salt_Lake_City Utah eight four seven zero zero” becomes:

“170 W. 100 S., #50, Salt Lake City, UT 84700” n

Format times: Enabled by default. Turns on automatic standard time formatting. For example, if you say "Six Thirty PM," Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional transcribes "6:30 PM." Dictating standard time runs on a 12 hour clock, letting you make the distinction between AM and PM.

Military time: With this option enabled, you can also dictate times in military format. For example, if you say "sixteen hundred hours," Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional transcribes "1600 hrs." If you say "oh three oh five hours" or "zero three zero five hours," Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional transcribes "0305 hrs."

Dictated Military time uses a 24 hour clock and abbreviates "hours" to "hrs." n

Format web and e-mail addresses: Enabled by default. Applies correct formatting to Web and e-mail addresses. For example, "john_ [email protected]" instead of "john_doe at acme corp dot com." n

Insert two spaces after period: Disabled by default. Adds two spaces after the end of a sentence instead of a single space. Having two spaces at the end of a

83

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide sentence used to be standard with mono space fonts produced by typewriters, but is less common with proportional fonts used in word processing programs. If you do not select this option, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional adds a single space after the period.

n

"million" instead of ".000.000": Enabled by default. Inserts numbers as a combination of Arabic numerals and text. For example, "5 million" instead of

"5,000,000."

North American region settings n

Format US Social Security Numbers: Disabled by default. Inserts hyphens in the appropriate location of a number that contains 9 digits when someone dictates it with pauses where the hyphens belong.

n

Format UK and Canadian postcodes: Disabled by default. Properly formats UK and

Canadian postcodes. For example, "N1 8HQ" instead of "n18hq," or "L3X 1A4" instead of "l3x1a4." .

n

Date format: Controls how Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional formats dates when the day, month, and year have all been dictated. Select the format you want from the list.

If you use the default Dates As Spoken value, you need to dictate dates in an unambiguous way, using the name of the month not the digit for the month. For example, with Dates As Spoken selected, Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional correctly formats "January eleven two thousand nine" and "the seventh of February two thousand four" as dates but formats "eleven one two thousand nine" as a number.

If you prefer to dictate dates using digits for the month, try selecting the value that best matches how you dictate the date. For example, if you normally say "eleven one two thousand nine", you should set the date format to D/M/YYYY to have

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional correctly transcribe the date.

If you omit the year, for example, you say "July twelve", Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional transcribes "July 12" ("The twelfth of July" becomes "12 July") regardless of the type of date formatting you select.

Valid values are: l

Dates As Spoken l

Month D,YYYY l

Month DD,YYYY l

Mon D,YYYY l

Mon DD,YYYY l

M/D/YYYY l

M/D/YY l

MM/DD/YYYY l

MM/DD/YY l

MM-DD-YY l

D Month, YYYY

84

Chapter 4: Configuring groups and user accounts l

D/M/YYYY l

D/M/YY l

DD/MM/YYYY l

DD/MM/YY l

DD-Mon-YY l

YYYY-MM-DD n

Numbers, if greater than or equal to __: Enabled by default. Inserts numbers as numerals if they are equal to or greater than the value shown in the drop-down list. If the number is less than the chosen value, the number is spelled out. For example, if you select "10," Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional transcribes "five" when you dictate "five" and "11" when you dictate "eleven".

Valid values are: Do Not Format, 0, 2, 10, 100. The default value is 0.

Viewing User Profile settings

In the User Account Details > User Profile tab, you view current settings for a User

Profile. This information is 'read only' in the Nuance Management Console.

The settings that you can view in the User Profile tab are: n

Language: The language or dialect (such as US English or UK English) that the user uses for dictation. Your choices will depend on the Dragon Medical edition you are using.

n

Language Accent: The type of accent that the user uses for dictation. n

Vocabulary: The Vocabulary list shows the different types of vocabularies available with Dragon Medical and shows the vocabulary selected for the user profile associated with the user account. For a list of available Medical vocabularies, see

Selecting a medical vocabulary on page 1. n

Input Devices: The type of device into which the user will be speaking.

The fields in the User Account Details > User Profile tab display language specific information for DNS Professional .

The following text is displayed above the Language field:

'When a profile is linked to this user account, this section will be populated with the profile settings the user selected in Dragon Professional'.

Language: n

If the user is using US settings, the field displays “Language: English (US)”.

n

If the user is using UK settings, the field displays “Language: English (UK)”.

n

If the user's language settings are not know, the field displays “Language: ”.

Language Accent: n

If the user's language settings are not know, the field displays “Language Accent:

”.

85


Vocabulary: n

If the user's language settings are not know, the field displays “Vocabulary: ” and is disabled.

Input Devices: n

If the user's language settings are not know, the field displays “Input devices: ” and is disabled.

Profile folder name: n

The name of the folder that contains the profile.

Automatically log out an administrator after a period of inactivity

You can set the NMS to automatically log out a user after a specific time of inactivity.

After you set the timeout value, the NMS applies the value the next time a user logs into the

NMS.

When the NMS logs out a user, it discards all unsaved data.

1. In the Nuance Management Console, click Organizations.

2. In the click Organizations area, click Search.


4. Select an organization.

5. In the Organizations area, select Details.

6. On the Organization Details screen, click Products.

7. Expand the Nuance Management Server section.

8. In the NMC Inactivity timeout in __ minutes field, enter a value.

9. Click OK.

Viewing, modifying, and deleting a user account

Once you have created and configured a user account you can return to it at any time and perform the tasks below:

Notes: n

You must have the appropriate Nuance Management Console Administrator security rights to perform these tasks.

Finding and viewing a user account

1. On the menu bar, click User Accounts and then click the Search icon on the User


2. Enter your search criteria on the User Accounts tab.

86


You can search for user accounts based on the information that you entered on the

User Account Details tab. You do not have to fill out all of the fields; you can search on a single field or even a few letters in that field.

3. Click the magnifying glass.

The system displays a list of user accounts that meet your search criteria. If you click the magnifying glass without entering any search criteria, the system displays a list of all of the user accounts in the system.

4. In the list, double-click on the name of the user whose account information you want to view, or select the user on the list and then click Details in the User Accounts ribbon.

The User Account Details window opens and displays all of the settings for the selected user account on the Details, Address, Group Memberships,

Messaging. For more details about these tabs, see Creating user accounts on page

56

Deleting a user account

1. On the menu bar, click User Accounts and then click the Search icon on the User


2. In the User Accounts window, enter your search criteria.

3. You can search for user accounts based on the information that you entered on the User

Account Details tab. You do not have to fill out all of the fields; you can search on a single field or even a few letters in that field.


5. Select the user Account that you want to delete from the list and then click Delete on the

User Accounts ribbon.

6. A message displays and asks if you want to delete the user account. Click Yes to delete the account.

Modifying a user account

1. Use the procedure above to find the user account.

The changes you can make to a user account depend on your security rights. Fields that you cannot modify are shaded in gray and are inactive.

2. On the Details and Address tabs (see Configuring user account details and

address settings on page 58) you can:

l

Change contact information for the user l

Change the user account password. For more details about setting options for passwords, see Setting user password settings.

3. On the Group Memberships tab you can: l

Add or remove the user account from a group. See Assigning user accounts to

groups on page 62

l

Set the default group for a user by moving it to the top of the Selected Groups list.

87


5.

6.

iii. On the Messaging tab you can: l

Set email and mobile messaging options. See Enable sending mes-

sages to an administrator on page 60.

4. On the Dragon Professional tab you can: l

Configure the User Account Options, see Setting user account Dragon Nat-

urallySpeaking Professional client options on page 78

l

Modify the text Auto Formatting settings, see Setting Auto-Formatting Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional options on page 82

5. On the User Profile tab you can: n l

View the default language and accent for the user profile.

l

View the Vocabulary and Input devices for the user profile. See

Viewing User Profile settings on page 85.

l

View the Dragon client settings that are only configurable in the

Dragon client for the user profile.

4. When your modifications are complete, click Save to apply them to the user account.

Changing the user account password

88

1. On the User Account Details screen, click the Details tab.

2. Click the Change password button.

3. In the Change Password dialog box, enter the new password and then confirm it by entering it a second time.

4. Click OK to save the password and return to the User Account Details tab

Applying Dragon Settings to organizations, sites, or groups

You can apply Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Settings at the following levels: n

For the organization n

For the site


For the group n

For the user account

One feature that you must set on the Dragon Client is the Vocabulary.

If you set the feature for a group, and the group is the first on the Group Details >

Members > Group members list, it applies to all user accounts in that group.

If you set feature for a user account, it applies only to that user account and the user account level setting overrides the group or site setting.

Configuring the Dragon settings

The following links provide more information on the how to configure the Dragon settings: n

Turning on data collection for your site on page 176

n

Setting Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional voice command options for user

groups on page 100

n

Setting Auto-Formatting Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional options on page 82

89

Chapter 5: Managing licenses

You can quickly and easily assign licenses to individuals who are managing the system or dictating using the Dragon Client. This chapter describes how to grant and revoke licenses and how to obtain information on the licenses being used by your organization.

Use this chapter to configure settings in the NMC that are common for most products that use the Nuance Management Server.

The information in this chapter is for administrators that have the privileges to configure settings for Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional.

Managing licenses

When you first install Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional, you enter the organization number that Nuance provides, and after the installation is complete, you already have a user account named admin that you can use to log on.

You purchase three types of licenses: n

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Administrator—License to access the NMS

Server and configure the system. Nuance provides two free licenses of this type.

n

Author—License for any type of user to dictate using the Dragon Client.

DNS Professional allows only NMC Administrator users with particular privileges to manage licenses for all other users.

Types of license upgrades available

If you are an existing customer and would like to purchase additional licenses or upgrade your existing licenses, you can contact your Nuance representative.

Obtaining and applying licenses

When you first purchase the product, you also usually purchase some initial licenses. To later purchase additional licenses, contact your Nuance representative.

91


Importing licenses included with Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional

You can purchase as many licenses as you need up front when you purchase the product. Later, when you start the NMS Server, to download the licenses purchased for your account:

1. On the menu bar click Licensing, and then click the Import License Key icon. The

Import License Key window opens.

2. Copy and paste the encrypted license key you received in e-mail into the License Key box.

3. Click Show Information.

4. Click Import. The NMS Server decrypts the license key and generates the licenses on your system where they become available for you to grant to the user accounts you create.

Purchasing and obtaining new licenses

When you purchase additional licenses through your Nuance representative, once the licenses have been issued, you see a message about the license or licenses in Utilities>

Messages. You do not have to take any action to receive those licenses. You are not required to approve them to initiate download of those licenses; instead, the licenses appear in the Licenses Summary when you click Licensing > View Licenses tab, where you can grant those licenses to particular administrators or . To refresh the data on the Licenses Summary screen, press Refresh at the bottom right of the screen.

For more information on working with the licenses in the Licenses Summary, see: n

Granting licenses on page 95

n

Receiving expiration alerts and renewing licenses on page 97

n

Revoking licenses on page 98

Viewing licenses

After you have purchased licenses and prepared to grant those licenses, any individual with an NMC Administrator user account that you assigned the appropriate security rights can take steps to view the licenses that are in the NMS Server.

Viewing existing licenses

1. Click Licensing on the menu bar.

2. Click the View Licenses icon.

3. In the Licenses Summary screen, enter the search criteria.

4. Click Search. The Licenses Summary screen displays the search results.

l

Organization Name—Each license is associated with a particular organization for a particular product.

l

Mode—This field is always set to Account or Enterprise.

92

Chapter 5: Managing licenses l

OEM Name— Ignore this field.

l

Product Name—For an NMC Administrator license, the product name is the

Nuance Mgt Console (NMC); for a Dragon Professional license, the product type is Dragon NaturallySpeaking.

l

License Type—NMC Administrator (for using the Nuance Management

Console), or Dragon Professional (for dictating on client workstations).

l

Expires on—The expiration date for the license. l

Total Licenses— Total number of licenses of the particular type that you have, whether or not you have granted them to anyone.

l

Used Licenses—Total number of licenses of the particular type that you have granted to user accounts.

5. To refresh the data on the Licenses Summary screen, press Refresh at the bottom right of the screen.

6. From this table, you can now grant or revoke licenses.

As you grant the licenses, the number of that type of licenses available automatically adjusts in the table. Likewise, when you receive the new licenses from Nuance, the

NMS Server adjusts the number of licenses of that type in the Licenses Summary table.

Viewing license usage information

In the Nuance Management Console, you can create a report and view data about how your

DNS Professional licenses are being used in your network by indicating how often and when users last logged in to either the Dragon Client (Author licenses) or the NMS (Administrator licenses).

You can view usage information for available license types. The following license types are specific to DNS Professional: n

NMC Administrator n

Author license

.You can use the license usage information in the report to manage and optimize the use of

DNS Professional licenses in your organization. For example, if a user with a DNS

Professional license does not use the license frequently, you can re-assign the DNS

Professional license to another user.

You can also use the license usage information to plan the future license requirements for your organization.

To generate and view the usage report, you must have the proper administrative rights in the

Nuance Management Server (NMS).

1. Open the Nuance Management Console.

93


2. In the Trends section, under Usage, select License Use.

The Nuance Management Console displays the License Usage view.

3. Select the search criteria for the report:

i. The Organization field is greyed out.

ii. In the License type field, select a license type.

iii. In the Start Date/Time field, select a start date and time.

iv. In the End Date/Time field, select an end date and time.


The Nuance Management Console generates a report using data from the Nuance

Management Server.

94

The Nuance Management Console displays the report as a grid with the following information: n

Login - The login information of the user.

n

Last Name - The last name of the user.

n

First Name - The first name of the user.

n

Last Login - The date and time that the user last logged into the system.

Chapter 5: Managing licenses n

Days Since Last Login - The number of days since the last date the user logged into the system.

n

Login Count -The total number of times the user logged into the system between the

Start Date/time to the End date/time.

Save search results to a .csv file

On screens that display search results, you can save the search result data for future use.

A status bar at the bottom right of the screen displays: n The number of rows on the screen, for example: .

n An icon that refreshes the search results .

n The save icon.

i. Press the icon.

ii. In the dialog box, browse to a location to save the file.

iii. Press Save.

Granting licenses

You can grant licenses when you create a user account or after you create the account.

If you delete a user account for a professional who still has an active license, the license becomes available for you to grant to another user.

Granting a license immediately after creating a user account

1. When you first create a new user account, if you have already downloaded licenses, when you save the user account, the NMC display the Licenses dialog box .

2. In the Licenses dialog box , select one or more types of licenses to assign to the user account.

3. Once you select the license types, if purchased licenses of that type are available on the server, NMS Server automatically assigns them to the user account. Otherwise, it pops up a message, saying the license is not available. If the license is not available, that's not a problem, as you can grant the license later, after you either purchase or download more licenses or free up a license from another user account by revoking that account's license or deleting the user account.

Granting a license to an existing user account

To grant a license to an existing user account:

1. Click Licensing on the menu bar.

2. In the ribbon below the Licensing tab, click the View Licenses icon.

3. In the Licenses Summary screen, enter search criteria in the fields and click Search.

95


4. Click on the row with the type of license that you want to grant.

5. In the License Allocation section, click the Grant icon.

6. When the Grant License tab opens, the organization's name and the type of license appear in the top left of the screen. Below the organization name, you see a list of

Available Users containing the names of people whose user accounts that do not have licenses. To the right of the Available Users section, you see an empty list of

Selected Users. A small box labeled Available Licenses displays the number of licenses that are available for you to assign.

96

Select the person or persons to grant the license to in the Available Users list and those names become highlighted.

7. Click the > button between the two lists to move that user's name to the Selected

Users list. The user name(s) move to the Selected Users list on the right and the number of available licenses then reduces to show that fewer licenses are available.

8. If you missed any names, repeat the last three steps for other users in the Available

Users list who you'd like to grant the same type of license.

9. If you make a mistake or change your mind about granting one of these licenses while the tab is still open, you can click on the name in the Selected Users list and click the < button to return that name to the Available Users list.

Chapter 5: Managing licenses

10. When you are satisfied that licenses listed are those you want to grant, click OK to save the information and grant the licenses. The tab closes and you return to the

Licenses Summary table.

11. Repeat this process for each type of license you want to grant.

Receiving expiration alerts and renewing licenses

Thirty days before a Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional license is going to expire, you start receiving alerts about that fact. You should be sure to renew the license before it expires.

Viewing messages about expired licenses

If a license is close to expiring, you receive a reminder message. To view messages that might contain alerts about licenses that are expiring soon:

1. Click the Utilities tab on the ribbon.

2. Click Messages.

3. In the Messages window, search for messages that are related to licenses. Expiration messages look like the following messages:

4. If the message says a license or set of licenses are about to expire, you should follow the renewal process below to renew the license.

Renewing the License

To renew an existing license:

1. Contact your Nuance representative. The representative should be able to verify your official organization number and take you through the process of purchasing renewal licenses and any additional licenses you would like.

97


2. Once the renewal is approved, the licenses download to the Nuance Management

Server. You can then see the licenses in your Nuance Management Console.

Revoking licenses

To revoke a license that is associated with a user account:

1. Click Licensing on the menu bar and in the ribbon below the Licensing tab you see the

View Licenses icon.

2. Click the View Licenses icon.

3. Enter search criteria and click Search.

4. Click on a license that you want to revoke.

5. To revoke the license from one or more uses, in the Licensing area, click the Revoke icon. The Nuance Management Console displays the Revoke License tab. In the tab, you see a list of Licensed Users to the left and an empty Selected users list to the right.

6. In the Licensed Users list, select one or more users to revoke a license from, then click the button between the two lists with a > symbol in it. The names move to the Selected

users list.

7. Click OK to save the change. The tab closes and you return to the Licenses Summary table. The newly revoked licenses should be added to the number of licenses available in the table.

8. Repeat this process for each type of license you want to revoke.

Dictating with Author licenses while disconnected from network

Because licenses to dictate with a Dragon Client are always stored on the NMS Server, each user with an Author license must log on to the network at least every 90 days. The 90 day limit is how long the professional can dictate (usually on a laptop) without connecting to the server to refresh the license.

If the user tries to dictate for longer than 90 days without connecting to the server, Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional rejects that provider's user name and password, and prompts the professional to connect to the network.

The Dragon Client continues to refuse the user access until after the dictation equipment has been reconnected to the network, where the NMS Server can confirm authorization to use the license.

98

Chapter 6: Configuring Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional settings

This chapter describes the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional options you can set in the Nuance Management Console.

99

Applying Dragon Settings to organizations, sites, or groups

You can apply Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Settings at the following levels: n

For the organization n

For the site n

For the group n

For the user account

One feature that you must set on the Dragon Client is the Vocabulary.

If you set the feature for a group, and the group is the first on the Group Details > Members >

Group members list, it applies to all user accounts in that group.

If you set feature for a user account, it applies only to that user account and the user account level setting overrides the group or site setting.

Configuring the Dragon settings

The following links provide more information on the how to configure the Dragon settings: n

Turning on data collection for your site on page 176

n

Setting Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional voice command options for user groups on page 100

n

Setting Auto-Formatting Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional options on page 82

Setting Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional voice command options for user groups

Under Group Details > Dragon Professional > Commands, you set voice command options that control how Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional interprets voice commands.

Once you configure commands for a group, the command settings apply to all users in the group. n

Enable mouse motion commands: By default, this feature is enabled. Allows the user to use mouse motion commands such as "Move Mouse left," "Faster," and "Slower." Use the

Mouse movement slider to control how quickly the mouse pointer moves across the screen.

n



n


Enabling this option makes available a set of voice commands designed for users to use for creating or editing messages in HTML format in certain Microsoft Outlook dialog boxes.

These dialog boxes appear with the Internet Explorer symbol (a small document icon with

100

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide the letter "e" in it) in the left corner of the window header. You may need to disable this setting for certain applications. For more information, see the Client Help.

n


Select this option to disable the "automatically select the first field" feature for a group of users.

n

Require click to select hyperlinks in HTML windows: By default, this feature is enabled and the group level setting applies.

n

Requires that the user speak the word "Click" to select a hyperlink, such as "Click nuance.com" instead of just "nuance.com." n

Enable recognition mode switching commands: Enabling recognition mode switching allows users in the group to dictate and say the mode switching commands interchangeably. Turning off recognition mode switching disables the ability to switch between modes. For example: l

Dictation Mode: In Dictation Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional interprets everything you say as dictation and nothing is interpreted as a command. Say

"Start Dictation Mode" or "Switch to Dictation Mode." l

Command Mode: In Command Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional interprets everything you say as a command and nothing is interpreted as dictated text. Say

"Start Command Mode" or "Switch to Command Mode." l

Spell Mode: In Spell Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional allows you to say any combination of letters, digits, or symbols as you might need to do dictating license plate or parts numbers. Say "Start Spell Mode" or "Switch to Spell Mode." l

Numbers Mode: In Numbers Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional interprets your dictation as numbers. Say "Start Numbers Mode" or "Switch to Numbers

Mode." l

Normal Mode: The most flexible mode in Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional is

Normal Mode. In Normal Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional distinguishes dictation from commands by analyzing what you say between pauses.

Say "Start Normal Mode" or "Switch to Normal Mode."


n

Enable web search commands: Select this option to make available Web search commands that let users in the group search the Internet using commands that are patterned on their natural speech. See Voice Shortcuts for Web Search in the Client

Help for more information.

n

Enable desktop search commands: Select this option to make available Desktop search commands that let users in the group search their Windows desktops using commands that are patterned on their natural speech. See Voice Shortcuts for

Desktop Search in the Client Help for more information.

n

Enable Email and Calendar commands: Select this option to make available Voice

Shortcuts for Email and Calendar that let users in the group control Outlook's email and calendar functions using commands that are patterned on their normal speech.

See the Client Help for more information.

n



101


n

Variable delimiters: By default the group level setting applies.

The variable delimiters are used by Text and Graphics/auto-text commands that incorporate Voice (variable) Fields. Voice Fields are variable fields where the user can later type or dictate a specific value.

By default, Text and Graphics/auto-text Voice commands use the square bracket [ ] characters to indicate the presence of a variable field. To change the variable delimiting characters, specify a character for the left and right delimiters.

The delimiting "characters" can each be up to 5 characters long. The left and right delimiters cannot be exactly the same as each other or, when you try to apply them, the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional displays a message that they are not valid.

Caution: Nuance recommends you set the delimiting characters once and never change them, because if, for instance, you use square brackets in several Text and Graphics/auto-text commands, then change the delimiting characters to */ and /*, the Text and Graphics/auto-text commands that are using the square brackets then fail because the Client looks for variables only between */ and /*, not between [ and ].

For more information about using variables with Text and Graphics/auto-text commands, see the Client Help.

n



Enable Facebook post commands: Enable this option to use commands that work with Facebook.

Enable Twitter post commands: Enable this option to use commands that work with Twitter.

Setting user account Dragon options

On the User Account Details > Dragon Professional > User Account Options tab, you can configure settings for the individual user that override settings that you already selected for the group.

Setting User Account options

By default, settings are configured at the group level and the Group option to the right of a setting is selected. To override the group settings, select the Personal option next to a setting.

102




n


Enabling this option makes available a set of voice commands designed for users to use for creating or editing messages in HTML format in certain Microsoft

Outlook dialog boxes. These dialog boxes appear with the Internet Explorer symbol (a small document icon with the letter "e" in it) in the left corner of the window header. You may need to disable this setting for certain applications. For more information, see the Client Help.

n

Require click to select hyperlinks in HTML windows: By default the group level setting applies.

If you select this option, it requires that the user speak the word "Click" to select a hyperlink, such as "Click nuance.com" instead of just "nuance.com." You may need to disable this setting for certain applications.

n


Select this option to disable the "automatically select the first field" feature for a user or a group of users.

n

Variable delimiters: By default the group level setting applies. Usually you do not change delimiters for an individual user because they are most effective when they apply across an entire group's documents.

l

Variable delimiters in templates (Text & Graphics commands that incorporate voice (variable) fields), are characters that surround each voice field location in the template/command where the user can later type or dictate a specific value. l

By default, a pair of square brackets [ ] indicates the presence of a voice field.

To use different characters to indicate a voice field, enter the characters you prefer to use for left and right delimiters. l

Delimiting "characters" can each be up to 5 characters long. The left and right delimiters cannot be exactly the same as each other or, when you try to apply them, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional displays a message that they are not valid. n

Saving the user also saves local acoustics: By default the site level setting applies.

Select this option to save the user's acoustic information locally on the client. By saving the acoustic information, any corrections the user makes are available even after a close and re-open of the user profile. In addition, selecting this option synchronizes all corrections in the Local cache user profile with the roaming user profiles if you also turned on the Always copy acoustic information to

network option at the site level (active by default).

103




n

Remove local cache data after usage: By default the site level setting applies. Deletes the contents of the local cache when the user logs out.

Note: If you want to enable this option, you must disable the Allow

disconnected mode option. Conversely, if you want to enable the Allow

disconnected mode option, you must disable this option to allow it to work. The effects of one setting cancel out the effects of the other.

n

Save user profiles upon automatic logout: Set this option to save the user profile when a user logs out of the system.

n

Enable recognition mode switching commands: Enabling recognition mode switching allows users in the group to dictate and say the mode switching commands interchangeably. Turning off recognition mode switching disables the ability to switch between modes. For example: n l

Dictation Mode: In Dictation Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional interprets everything you say as dictation and nothing is interpreted as a command. Say "Start Dictation Mode" or

"Switch to Dictation Mode." l

Command Mode: In Command Mode, Dragon Nat-

urallySpeaking Professional interprets everything you say as a command and nothing is interpreted as dictated text. Say "Start

Command Mode" or "Switch to Command Mode." l

Spell Mode: In Spell Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Pro-

fessional allows you to say any combination of letters, digits, or symbols as you might need to do dictating license plate or parts numbers. Say "Start Spell Mode" or "Switch to Spell Mode." l

Numbers Mode: In Numbers Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional interprets your dictation as numbers. Say "Start Numbers Mode" or "Switch to Numbers Mode." l

Normal Mode: The most flexible mode in Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional is Normal Mode. In Normal

Mode, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional distinguishes dictation from commands by analyzing what you say between pauses. Say "Start Normal Mode" or "Switch to Normal Mode."


n

Enable web search commands: Select this option to make available Web search commands that let users in the group search the Internet using commands

104

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide that are patterned on their natural speech. See Voice Shortcuts for Web Search in the Client Help for more information.

n

Enable desktop search commands: Select this option to make available

Desktop search commands that let users in the group search their Windows desktops using commands that are patterned on their natural speech. See Voice

Shortcuts for Desktop Search in the Client Help for more information.

n

Enable Email and Calendar commands: Select this option to make available

Voice Shortcuts for Email and Calendar that let users in the group control Outlook's email and calendar functions using commands that are patterned on their normal speech. See the Client Help for more information.

n




n



n

Enable Facebook post commands: Enables users to use commands that work with Facebook.

n

Enable Twitter post commands: Enables users to use commands that work with

Twitter.

n

Upload dictation data to Nuance for research purposes: By default the

Organization level setting applies.

Select this option to automatically upload data from a user's dictation and user profile to Nuance so that the company can improve future versions of the product and further enhance speech recognition technology. You might want to turn on this option for a user whose dictation is particularly difficult to recognize.

Setting language-specific settings

A large number of Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional settings are configured in the

Nuance Management Console and then retrieved by the Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional client. These settings include administrative settings, configuration options, and formatting options.

You can set Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional settings for a specific language. Each language has it own complete set of Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional settings. You can only configure language-specific settings at the user and group level.

Changing a setting in one language does not change the setting in a different language.

User setting and group setting priority occurs within the same language.

105

Setting language-specific settings

To perform the following steps, you must have the rights to manage groups and users, and, the appropriate licenses and rights to see Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional settings.

1. In the Nuance Management Console, in the Organizations area, click Details.

2. On the Organization Details screen, click Products.

3. Expand the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional section.

4. To manage US settings, select Enable US Settings. The option is checked by default.

5. To manage UK settings, select Enable UK Settings.

6. To manage both US and UK settings, select Enable US Settings and Enable UK Set-

tings.

7. To manage US user settings, select a user, and navigate to the User Account Details >

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional US tab.

8. To manage UK user settings, select a user, and navigate to the User Account Details >

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional UK tab.

9. To manage US group settings, select a group, and navigate to the Group Details >

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional US tab.

10. To manage UK group settings, select a group, and navigate to the Group Details >

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional UK tab.

11. Change the user or group level settings and click Save.

106

Chapter 7: Managing user profiles

The sections in this chapter help you understand actions that you carry out to upgrade user profiles from earlier versions of Dragon.

Creating a user profile

On the NMS Server you create user accounts that later associate with user profiles, but you do not create any actual user profiles on the server. Only the Dragon Client creates user profiles. As long as you have created a user account for a user to log on to the Dragon Client, Dragon takes it from there.

Every time a user dictates for the first time, Dragon creates a user profile based on a combination of the provider's language, accent, audio input device, and vocabulary with the provider's voice and speech patterns.

Configuring the location of Roaming user profiles

When an end user logs into Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional through the NMS server, the

NMS sends the location of the user's profile to Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional. This allows Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional to find and access the user profile.

An administrator can configure these locations in the Nuance Management Console.

Setting the location of roaming user profiles

1. In the Nuance Management Console, in the Sites area, click Organization Overview.

2. Select a site.

3. In the Sites > Sites area, click Details.

4. Select the Dragon Professional tab.

108


5. Expand the Roaming User Profile section.

6. Select the Enable Roaming User Profiles option to enable the use of Roaming User Profiles with Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional.

7. Beside the text Roaming User Network Directories, click the Configure button. The

Nuance Management Console displays the Roaming User Network Directories window.

8. In the General tab, fill-in the following fields:

109 l

Name—The name for the Roaming User Profiles location.

l

Dragon Speech Profile Location—The location of the Roaming User Profiles. The location must be accessible to all server machines and workstations on the network and can be either a mapped drive, a UNC location, or a web server URL (http:// or https:// for a secure web server). If you cannot browse to the location, when you explicitly enter the path, be sure it is in the format shown below based on the way servers on your network access the Roaming User Profiles location: n

Mapped network drive—Use this format: <drive letter>:\<folder name>.

For example, Y:\Profiles.

Chapter 7: Managing user profiles n

UNC Path—Use this format: \\servername\sharename\path\filename. For example, \\MyServer\Profiles n

HTTP—Use this format: http://myserver.com/webDAV. For example, http://Profiles/MasterUserProfilesDir n

HTTPS—The format is: https://myserver.com/WebDAV. For example, https://Profiles/UserProfilesDir

The HTTP Settings tab

If Roaming User Profiles Are Located on a Web Server

If you have set up a web server (http) to house your Roaming User Profiles, then under the HTTP Settings tab, you set up access to that web server. For details, see

Setting site HTTP connection settings for Roaming User Profiles .

The SSL Settings tabs

If Roaming User Profiles Are Located on an SSL Web Server

If you have set up a secure socket layer (SSL) web server (https) to house your

Roaming User Profiles, then under the SSL Settings tab, you set up access to that

secure web server. For details, see Setting site SSL connection settings for Roaming

User Profiles .

Note: You must install a third-party web server application called WebDAV to set up a compatible WebDAV HTTP or SSL server. WebDAV software is required in order to access and secure Roaming User Profiles on the Internet location. The WebDAV application is available free of charge at www.webdav.org

.

Exporting and Importing User Profiles

You can export User Profiles on one computer and import them for use on another.

When you export a User Profile to a new location, any custom words added to a Local

Roaming User Profile do not accompany the User Profiles unless you first run the Learn

from specific documents wizard in the Accuracy Center .

Exporting User Profiles

To export User Profiles from Dragon:

1. On the DragonBar, select Profile > Manage User Profiles.

2. The Manage User Profiles dialog box opens.

3. Select the User Profile in the list that you want to export.

4. Click the Advanced button and select Export from the menu that appears.

5. When the Browse For Folder dialog box opens, navigate to the folder where you want to store the exported User Profile (or create a new folder by clicking the Make New

Folder button) and click OK.

110


6. When a dialog box opens displaying a message indicating the export was successful, click

OK.

7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each set of User Profiles you want to export.

8. Click Close to close the Manage User Profiles dialog box.

9. In the operating system, navigate to the directory where you exported the User Profiles. In that directory you find a separate folder for each exported User Profile, labeled with the user name.

Importing User Profiles

To import User Profiles into Dragon that you previously exported on a different computer:

1. On the DragonBar, select Profile > Manage User Profiles. The Manage User Profiles dialog box opens.

2. Click the Advanced button and select Import from the menu.

3. When the Browse For Folder dialog box opens, navigate to the folder to retrieve a set of exported User Profiles from.

4. Select the folder in that directory that has the name of the User Profile to import and click

OK.

5. If the User Profile already exists a User already exists dialog box opens and asks you to choose how to proceed: Overwrite the existing user or Import the user with an

alternate name. If you choose to import the User Profile and assign it another name, enter the name in the text box provided and click OK.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each end-user whose User Profiles you want to import.

7. Click Close to close the Manage User Profiles dialog box.

Creating Windows shortcuts to User Profiles and

Vocabularies

If Dragon NaturallySpeaking is shared with other people, or if a person has more than one

User Profile, you can create Windows Shortcuts on the Desktop to start Dragon

NaturallySpeaking and open particular User Profiles. If User Profiles have multiple

Vocabularies, you can also specify the Vocabulary to open.

To create a shortcut to a User Profile and Vocabulary

1. Right-click the Dragon NaturallySpeaking shortcut icon on the Windows Desktop and then click Properties to open the icon's Properties dialog box.

2. Click the Shortcut tab of the Properties dialog box.

In the Start In box, at the end of the path type "natspeak.exe /user <User Profile

name>". The text in the target box should look similar to the following line:

"C:\Program Files (x86)

\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\Program\Natspeak.exe/user

"David" " for Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows Server 2008.

David is the name of the User Profile.

111


For Roaming User Profiles:

Or, if Roaming User is enabled, type the path to the Master Roaming User

Profile location, then /user, then the sub-folder if applicable, and then the User

Profile name on the network. The text in the target box should look similar to the following:

"C:\Program Files (x86)

\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\Program\Natspeak.exe/user

"\\<server_name>\<subfolder_path>\<user_profile_name>"for

(Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows Server 2008)

For Vocabularies

To specify a Vocabulary, follow the User Profile name with "/Vocabulary" and the name of the Vocabulary. The text in the target box should look similar to the following:

"C:\Program

Files\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\Program\NatSpeak.exe" /user

"David" /Vocabulary Psychiatry

If the User Profile or Vocabulary name contains a space, enclose the name in quotation marks. For example, enter: /user "Mike Workman" /Vocabulary

"Family Medicine - Large"

If the User Profile name contains a space, enclose the name in quotation marks.

For example, type: /user "Mike Workman"

3. Click OK.

When finished, double-click the shortcut icon to start Dragon NaturallySpeaking. The User

Profile opens along with the Vocabulary specified.

Types of Paths

The path can be a UNC, HTTP, or HTTPS path:

UNC

"C:\Program Files\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\Program\Natspeak.exe"

/user "\\<directory>\<directory>\<username>"

For example:


/user "\\Roaming\Profiles\Roaming1"

HTTP or HTTPS


/user "http://<url_of_server>\<user_name>"

For example:

112



/user "http://test01.roam.test\Roaming1" n

The path to an HTTP or HTTPS location must only contain forward slashes - the same as the Network Location dialog.

n

Precede the username with a backslash.

Tip

It is possible to add a shortcut to the top of the Start menu by dragging the shortcut icon onto the Start button.

Using multiple acoustic models with a User Profile

If the computer that an end-user dictates on meets certain system requirements, Dragon

NaturallySpeaking uses two acoustic models with a User Profile. Using two acoustic models instead of one improves recognition and dictation accuracy. Acoustic models that can be added in pairs to a User Profile are called BestMatch V models.

Any time you add a new dictation source to a User Profile that uses two BestMatch V models, the dictation source will also be associated with the two models.

A User Profile with two BestMatch V models uses more computer resources, including RAM memory, than a User Profile with one acoustic model. Dragon NaturallySpeaking uses two

BestMatch V models on a multi-core computer with at least 4 GB RAM. Dragon

NaturallySpeaking recognizes when it is installed on a computer that meets these system requirements and selects the BestMatch V acoustic model as the default.

Acoustic Optimization for User Profiles with BestMatch V acoustic models

BestMatch V is normally the default acoustic model if the system has at least 4GB of RAM.

If a User Profile includes BestMatch V models, you must run the Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer (ACO) on a computer with multi-core processors. Dragon

NaturallySpeaking uses two BestMatch V models only on a multi-core computer with at least

4 GB of RAM.

If the ACO processes a User Profile that was created on a computer with multi-core processors, the optimizer always selects the BestMatch V models to optimize.

Multiple acoustic models and User Profiles on single and multi-core computers

If an end-user creates a User Profile on a multi-core computer, when the end-user opens the

User Profile on a single-core computer, Dragon uses the first acoustic model for recognition.

Dragon does not load the second acoustic model.

If an end-user creates a User Profile on a single-core computer, when the end-user opens the

User Profile on a multi-core computer, Dragon uses the single acoustic model for recognition.

113


If an end-user selects BestMatch V models for a User Profile and trains the profile on a multicore computer, when the end-user opens the User Profile on a single-core computer,

Dragon displays the following warning message:

"Your computer has a single core processor. You have opened a User Profile created on a computer with a multi-core processor.

Dragon NaturallySpeaking will work normally on this computer but you may see some change in performance and accuracy".

114

Chapter 8: Configuring and using the Roaming feature and Roaming

User Profiles

This section describes how to set up, configure, and enable the Roaming feature on client computers. This section also provides information on how to create, dictate with, and upgrade Roaming User Profiles.

Setting up the Roaming feature

The Roaming feature lets end-users dictate with Dragon NaturallySpeaking from different network locations and on different computers without having to create and train individual User Profiles at each location.The Roaming feature works by storing User Profiles in a central network location so that the information Dragon learns from an end-user dictating on one computer is also available on other computers. To set up Roaming User Profiles, carry out the steps shown in the table below, in chronological order.

116


Topic

The Roaming feature

Setting up the Roaming feature n

Creating a network storage location for the Master Roaming User Profiles n

Where to install and configure Dragon NaturallySpeaking n

Storage space required for the Master and Local Roaming

User Profiles n

How Dragon Synchronizes Master and Local Roaming

User Profiles n

Estimating Network traffic caused by synchronization

Enabling the Roaming feature on each computer where an enduser dictates n

Setting Roaming User Profile locations n

Setting Roaming User Profile options n

Testing an HTTP or HTTPS connection

Creating Roaming User Profiles n

Creating and training a new Roaming User Profile n

Converting a non-roaming local User Profile into a Roaming User Profile n

Copying a non-Roaming User Profile to the Master Roaming User Profile location

Dictating with a Roaming User Profile n

Opening a Roaming User Profile n

Using multiple dictation sources with a single User Profile n

Running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer for

Roaming User Profiles n

Synchronizing Master and Local Roaming User Profiles

Upgrade Roaming User Profiles to Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Link n

Overview of the

Roaming feature

n

Setting up the Roaming feature

n

Enabling the Roaming feature on each computer where an end-user will dictate

n

Creating a

Roaming

User Profile on the local computer n

Dictating with a

Roaming

User Profile n

Upgrading

Roaming

User Profiles: Overview n

Enabling Enabling Roaming User Profiles as part of an MSI installation

117

Chapter 8: Configuring and using the Roaming feature and Roaming User Profiles

Topic Link

Roaming

User Profiles for an

MSI installation

Overview of the Roaming feature

The Roaming feature lets end-users dictate with Dragon from different network locations and on different computers without having to create and train individual User Profiles at each location.

Some situations that the Roaming feature makes possible: n

A doctor may need to dictate reports in a medical office building using a desktop computer, in a hospital room using a Tablet PC, or at home using a laptop computer. The Roaming feature allows the doctor to use the same set of User

Profiles containing the same vocabulary words with the acoustic information from each location.

n

An end-user dictates on the same laptop at multiple offices and at home. Before leaving the office, the end-user loads a set of User Profiles from a central location on the network to his laptop. Once home, the end-user dictates and corrects as you normally would. When the end-user returns to the office, they reconnect the laptop to the network. The next time the end-user opens a Dragon user profile, the Roaming feature synchronizes the updated User Profiles on the laptop with those at the network’s central location.

The relationship between the Master and the Local Roaming User Profile

With the Roaming feature, each Dragon user profile has a single Master Roaming User

Profile that can be opened from multiple networked computers running Dragon. The Master

Roaming User Profile is stored on a network location accessible to your dictating end-users.

When a Master Roaming User Profile is opened from that central network location, Dragon transfers a copy of that User Profile to the local computer. That local copy is called the Local

Roaming User Profile.

The Local Roaming User Profile is a copy of the end-user data taken from the Master

Roaming User Profile but modified locally by corrections and acoustic data gathered during a dictation session.

You can set a central storage device to contain all your Master Roaming User Profiles. By loading a Dragon User Profile from the central network location, your end-users can dictate at any computer where Dragon is installed. When end-users exit Dragon and save the changes to their User Profiles, these changes are saved in that central location. The next time the end-user runs Dragon, all the changes saved are available regardless of which computer on the network he or she uses for dictation.

118


Advantages of the Roaming feature

It is important to distinguish the Roaming feature from simply browsing to a network directory and creating files there. Nuance recommends using the Roaming feature rather than storing non-Roaming User Profiles in a network directory. Using the Roaming feature, you can: n

Minimize network traffic. When Dragon opens a User Profile, if there is already a copy of the Roaming User Profile on the local computer, only the updates are downloaded from the network. When the end-user closes the User Profile at the end of his or her dictation session, only the updates from the current session are uploaded to the network. These updates typically amount to no more than a few KB of data, as opposed to roughly 90 MB of data if the entire User Profile is opened and closed over the network.

n

Allow the end-user to use Dragon even if the network directory is unavailable. In that case, Dragon opens the local copy of the Roaming User Profile.

n

Give the administrator precise control over where end-users can put User Profiles. If the Roaming feature is enabled, the administrator can specify whether or not to also allow end-users to browse to any User Profile location; the default is not to allow browsing. This means that the administrator can easily see how many User Profiles have been created and who created them. If the Roaming feature is not enabled, endusers can browse to any location to which they have access and create User Profiles there. n

If HTTP Roaming is configured, it can be used to provide username/password authentication on User Profiles.

Hosting Master Roaming User Profiles

There are several methods for hosting your Master Roaming User Profiles: n

On a file server you connect to over a Mapped Drive n

On a file server that you connect to over a UNC (Universal Naming Convention) address n

On a web server that you connect to over HTTP (http://) n

On a secure web server that you connect to over SSL (https://)

Why the Master Roaming User Profiles should be in shared directories

Nuance recommends placing the master Roaming User Profiles in a shared directory to make certain administrative tasks more efficient. These tasks include: n

Scheduling an Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer task that optimizes multiple

User Profiles n

Upgrading multiple User Profiles to a new major release of Dragon n

Keeping track of how many User Profiles have been created, which helps with licensing compliance (note that Dragon is licensed per end-user, not per workstation)

It is possible, though not recommended, to place Roaming User Profiles in a non-shared, end-user-specific location such as the end-user’s home drive, provided every end-user’s home drive is mapped to the same drive letter (this is because the Roaming User Profile location is an administrative setting that is per-workstation, not per-user).

119


Using multiple Roaming User Profile locations

If you have a large number of Roaming User Profiles, you may want to divide them among multiple shared directories. This facilitates performing tasks such as scheduling the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on a subset of User Profiles. You can choose how to divide your User Profiles, for example: n

By department n

By alphabetical groupings (for example A through H, I through M, N through R, and S through Z)

On each PC, you can configure any number of Roaming User Profile locations. Make sure you give each Roaming User Profile location a display name that makes it clear to your endusers which location to choose from.

Controlling access to User Profiles

If you have multiple Dragon end-users on an end-user workstation, those end-users will have multiple User Profiles to choose from in Dragon's Open User Profile dialog box.

If you use a shared directory for User Profiles, whether they are roaming or non-roaming, you may be concerned about the ability of an end-user to see and/or open another enduser’s profile as well as their ability to open the correct profile. There are several ways to address this concern: n

Many of Nuance’s customers address this concern simply through end-user training.

Each end-user should be aware that if they open another end-user’s profile and try to use it, their accuracy will be poor and end-user-specific customizations will not be available. Therefore, each end-user has an incentive to use only their own profile.

However, this fact does not prevent a malicious end-user from damaging another end-user’s profile. n

If end-users always log into Windows with a unique Windows user ID, you can use

Windows file permissions to control access to the profiles. Typically, you do this by granting Full Control or Read/Write/Modify access to the shared directory, but do not allow this permission to propagate to sub-directories. That way, each end-user becomes the creator owner of any Dragon User Profile that he or she creates. Endusers can still see all of the Dragon User Profiles in the Open User Profile dialog box, but if they try to select another end-user’s profile, a message will appear saying that they do not have permission to access that profile. Apply similar file permissions to the local copy of each Roaming User Profile; the default location for local copies is under

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\RoamingUsers

for Windows

7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008. n

If end-users log in using a shared Windows user ID, the best way to control access is through HTTP Roaming. In this configuration, you set up a web server running either

IIS or Apache and with the WebDAV file system enabled. On each workstation, you specify a URL on the web server as the Roaming User Profile location. When an enduser launches Dragon, before displaying the Open User Profile dialog it prompts for a user name and password, which it uses to authenticate against the web server.

You can use file permissions on the web server to specify which User Profiles are accessible to each account on the web server. File security is a function of the web server and the WebDAV software.

120


Making it easier for end-users to select their User Profiles

As described above, the Dragon Open User Profile dialog shows a list of all of the User

Profiles in a shared directory (unless you are using HTTP Roaming to limit access to User

Profiles). If there are more User Profiles than will fit on one screen, you can train end-users to go directly to a specific User Profile by typing the first few letters of its name.

It is possible to create an icon in the Start Menu and/or the Windows desktop that opens a specific User Profile. This can be helpful if there are only a few end-users of Dragon who share a particular workstation. Make a copy of the Dragon icon for each end-user, and place the parameter /user ″user name″ on the natspeak.exe command line.

In Dragon NaturallySpeaking, you can display and view groups of User Profiles in a tree-style structure. See "Open User Profiles dialog box optimized for Roaming" in Dragon - What's

New for administrators for more information.

Backing up your Master Roaming User Profiles

Dragon does not backup local Roaming User Profiles on the end-user workstations and does not backup the Master Roaming User Profiles on the location where they are stored on your network.

It is the responsibility of your local system administrator to back up the Master Roaming User

Profiles.

Notes: For use of WebDAV n

After you install Internet Information Services and WebDAV, you need to use the

Internet Information Services Manager tool to set the “Allow Unknown MIME Types”,

“Allow Custom Properties”, and “Allow Property Queries with Infinite Depth” settings to true. For example, in IIS 7:

121

Chapter 8: Configuring and using the Roaming feature and Roaming User Profiles n

For more information, see Configuring Internet Information Services and WebDAV for HTTP Roaming .

n

If you connected to your Roaming User Profile Master Directory over HTTP and you find that the Open User Profile dialog box does not display all the vocabularies and acoustic models for your User Profiles, make sure that you: l

Check that no files in your User Profile directory are locked, password protected, or otherwise access-restricted by your server permissions.

Setting up the Roaming feature

When setting up the Roaming feature, note the following: n

Creating a network storage location for the Master Roaming User Profiles

n

Where to install and configure Dragon

n

Storage space required for the Master and Local Roaming User Profiles

n

Synchronizing Master and Local Roaming User Profiles

n

Estimating Network traffic caused by synchronization

Note: To enable the Roaming feature and set the Roaming User Profile options, you must log into an account with Windows Administrator privileges.

122


Creating a network storage location for the Master

Roaming User Profiles

For any installation of Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional, you must first determine where on the network the Master Roaming User Profiles should be located.

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional lets you store your Master Roaming User Profiles on: n

Any networked computer.

You are not strictly required to store Master Roaming User Profiles on a server. Any shared location accessible to other computers on the network is a perfectly acceptable place to store Master Roaming User Profiles.

n

A Windows file server n

A web server (HTTP) n

A secure web server running SSL (HTTPS)

Note: The location(s) you pick must be accessible to all computers where users will dictate with a Roaming User Profile. Each location must have adequate storage space for Roaming

User Profiles. For more information, see Storage space required for User Profiles

.

What to consider for the Master Roaming User Profile location

To set up a location for the Master Roaming User Profiles, you should first determine: n

The kind of network file server on which you want to store your Master Roaming User

Profiles. Make sure it has enough storage space. Each location you pick must be accessible to all computers where your users will dictate with Roaming User Profiles.

You can create multiple network storage locations.

n

How the computers from where your users will dictate will connect to that network location; for example using a mapped drive, UNC connection, or an HTTP or HTTPS connection.

Using a networked computer or Windows file server

If you choose to use a networked computer or Windows server, you should determine the path to where the Master Roaming User Profiles will reside. You can create multiple network storage locations.

The Roaming feature supports the following types of locations for your Master Roaming User

Profiles: n

Mapped Drives—Connects to a shared network folder that has a drive letter assigned to it.

n

UNC Paths—Connects to a shared network folder using the Universal Naming

Convention (UNC) to locate a User Profile. Format is:

\\<servername>\<sharename>\<path>\<filename>.

What you'll need to know to configure your local Roaming User Profiles

After you have chosen the type of computer to store the Master Roaming User Profiles, you should determine the following information so that you configure your local copies of Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional to connect to a mapped or shared drive:

123


Mapped Drives

UNC paths

Using a HTTP or HTTPS web server

If you choose to use a HTTP or HTTPS web server, the Roaming feature supports the following types of locations for your Master Roaming User Profiles n

HTTP (http:)—Connects to computer on the internet or your local intranet. Format is:

http://<myserver.com>/<webdav> n

HTTP with SSL (https:)—Connects to computer on the internet or your local intranet with SSL. Format is: https://<myserver.com>/<webdav>

Supported web servers

If you want to store your Master Roaming User Profiles on a web server, Internet access to

Master Roaming User Profiles is supported on two web servers: n

Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) 7.0 and 7.5. For this type of server: l

Be sure that the server has Web-based Distributed Authoring and

Versioning (WebDAV) software is turned on to publish content to an

Internet Information Services (IIS) web server.

If you have not already installed the WebDAV component, use the

Add or Remove Programs in your Control Panel and run the

Windows Components Wizard. WebDav is listed under Application

Server>Internet Information Services>World Wide Web

Service>WebDAV Publishing. n

Apache HTTP Server 2.0.54 and higher. For this type of server: l

Internet Roaming User—Redirects must be turned on when using

Digest authentication.

l

Be sure that the server has Web-based Distributed Authoring and

Versioning (WebDAV) software turned on. The WebDAV Apache module is available free of charge at http://www.webdav.org/mod_dav/

.

What you'll need to know to configure your local Roaming User Profiles

After you have chosen the type of computer to store the Master Roaming User Profiles, you should determine the following information so that you configure your local copies of Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional to connect to the HTTP server: n

The network location: You need to know the URL address of your

HTTP server. For more information, see XXXXX.

n

HTTP settings: For your http (or https) connection you need to know authentication, firewall, and proxy server information. For more information, see HTTP Settings .





124


125 n

For more information, see Configuring Internet Information Services and WebDAV for

HTTP Roaming .

n


Add all file extensions within your Master Roaming User Profile directories and sub-directories to the Registered MIME types list of your IIS server. You could also add a wildcard ( .*) MIME-type.

For more information on adding a wildcard ( .*) MIME-type, see:

For Windows Server 2008: http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc725608(WS.10).aspx

l


Where to install and configure Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Installing Dragon NaturallySpeaking where you plan to dictate using the Roaming feature

Dragon NaturallySpeaking must be installed each computer where you plan to have users dictating with Roaming User Profiles.


Installing Dragon NaturallySpeaking on the same computer as your Master Roaming User Profiles

Nuance recommends that you install Dragon NaturallySpeaking on the same computer where the Master Roaming User Profiles for your network are located.

As the system administrator, you are responsible for running the Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer on the network location of the Master Roaming User Profiles. The

Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer and the Acoustic and Language Model

Optimizer Scheduler can only be run on the Master Roaming User Profiles.

Running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer updates the Master Roaming User

Profiles with the accumulated acoustic data from any corrections and additional training done by the users at the computers where they dictate. Running the Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer will increase your overall accuracy. Any optimizations done by the

Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer are copied to each Local Roaming User

Profile when synchronization occurs.

Running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer over the network can result in a large amount of data being transferred between the server and the workstation running the optimizer.

For more information, see Running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer for

Roaming User Profiles .

If you are using Dragon NaturallySpeaking, see Using multiple acoustic models with a User

Profile

for information on using the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer with a User

Profile that has two acoustic models.

Notes: n

You must have Windows Administrator privileges on the computer where you are running the Scheduler for the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer.

n

Do not enable the Roaming feature on the administrator computer where you plan to run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer. n

When the Roaming feature is enabled on a computer where someone dictates, that computer is blocked from locally running the Acoustic and Language Model

Optimizer or the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer Scheduler on the local copy of the Roaming User Profiles.

For more information on installing or upgrading Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional

For more information on installing or upgrading Dragon NaturallySpeaking on the computers in your network, see: n

Upgrading Roaming User Profiles: Overview for information how to upgrade

Roaming User Profiles to Dragon NaturallySpeaking.

n

The Installation Guide that came with your copy of Dragon for information on installing

Dragon on a single computer.

n

The Dragon Administrator Guide for information on how to use MSI to install or upgrade Dragon on multiple computers.

126


Storage space required for the Master and Local Roaming

User Profiles

Adequate storage space must be available for User Profiles that store information about each particular user’s speech patterns.

You need to plan for storage space on: n

Each computer where you plan to have users dictating with a Roaming User Profile.

n

The network accessible central computer or computers where Master Roaming User

Profiles are stored.

These are guidelines only and not definitive specifications—actual size will vary from site to site.

For each Master Roaming User Profile on the network

For each Master Roaming User Profile (User Profiles stored on the central network location), you should plan on: n

90 MB for each set of Roaming User Profiles, this includes: l

21 MB for each additional vocabulary you add for this user profile l

68 MB for each additional dictation source you add for this user profile n

1000 MB for acoustic optimizer data associated with each dictation source of each

User Profile

For each computer where Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional is installed

You must install 1 copy of Dragon NaturallySpeaking on each computer where your users will be dictating with the Roaming feature. Multiple users can use a single Dragon installation.

Each installation of Dragon NaturallySpeaking takes a minimum of 1.8 GB of free hard disk space for a custom Installation where you install only the program files and 1 set of User

Profiles. Installations can range from 800 MB (US English Home Edition) to 5 GB (Dragon

NaturallySpeaking), depending on which languages and vocabularies you install. See

Dragon system requirements for information on disk space requirements for Dragon

NaturallySpeaking.

For each Local Roaming User Profile on the client PC

On each installation of Dragon where your users plan to dictate using the Roaming feature,

each Local Roaming User Profile (the User Profiles stored on the local computer running

Dragon NaturallySpeaking, require the following: n

90 MB for each set of Roaming User Profiles. This includes: l

21 MB for each additional vocabulary you add for this user profile l

68 MB for each additional dictation source you add for this user profile n

10 MB per topic for language model optimizer data in the topic container data n

240 MB for acoustic optimizer data associated with each dictation source of each User

Profile

How much acoustic optimizer data is retained locally is controlled by settings on the Data tab of the Options dialog box:

127


1. To set the number of minutes of audio to retain locally, click the Archive size... button and position the slider.

2. To turn off retaining this data locally, check the Conserve disk space required by user

profile (for portability) option.

A non-Roaming User Profile requires approximately three times as much disk space as a local Roaming User Profile. Dragonperiodically creates a backup copy of a non-Roaming

User Profile and stores the copy on the local computer. On the other hand, a Roaming User

Profile is stored in a network storage location and Dragon does not create a backup copy of a Roaming User Profile.

An administrator should create backup copies of all Roaming User Profiles on a regular basis.

How Dragon Synchronizes Master and Local Roaming

User Profiles

When an end-user that uses a Roaming User Profile exits Dragon, switches User Profiles, closes a User Profile, or saves a User Profile, Dragon saves changes to the Local Roaming

User Profile and then synchronizes these changes with the Master Roaming User Profiles on the network.

In a networked situation, this occurs at the time one of these operations is performed.

When an end-user dictates using a computer not currently connected to a network, all changes are saved to the Local Roaming User Profile; synchronization occurs when the end-user reattaches the computer to the network containing the Master Roaming User

Profile and opens that User Profile again.

For more information on what options affect what data gets synchronized between the

Master and Local Roaming User Profile, see Setting/selecting Roaming User Profile options.

Note: During synchronization, changes to the Master Roaming User Profile overwrite any changes made to a Local Roaming User Profile that an end-user has been using for dictating and correcting dictation while not on the network.

What happens during synchronization

The following changes take place when Local and Master Roaming User Profiles are synchronized: n

Combines words added to the Local Roaming User Profile during a dictation session with the Master Roaming User Profile vocabulary, n

Removes words deleted from the Local Roaming User Profile from the Master

Roaming User Profile vocabulary.

n

Copies acoustic data (from files with a .DRA or .NWV extension) from the Local

Roaming User Profile and adds them to the Master Roaming User Profile where the data become available to the Acoustic Optimizer (Note that .DRA files saved voluntarily by the end-user along with a document do not get added to the Master

Roaming User Profile. The.DRA files created automatically by Dragon for use by the optimizer are the only ones that get added to the Master Roaming User Profile). For

128


more information on running the Acoustic Optimizer, see Running the Acoustic and

Language Model Optimizer for Roaming User Profiles

.

n

Copies any custom commands created or modified locally (using the MyCommands editor) to the Master Roaming User Profile.

n

Saves any local end-user options that you changed on the Options or Formatting dialog box to the Master Roaming User Profile, except the options listed below.

What changes don't get synchronized

The following options are not synchronized with the Master Roaming User Profile; they remain exclusively on the local computer with the Local Roaming User Profile:

Locally set options on the Options dialog: n

On the Data tab: l

Conserve disk space required by user profile option l

Create usability log option in the Advanced dialog box l

Incremental adaptation in general training option n

On the Miscellaneous tab: l

Voice enable menus and dialog controls option l

Launch Dragon in QuickStart mode when Windows starts option n

On other tabs of Options dialog box: l

All the options on the Playback/Text-to-speech tab l

All the options on the Hot keys tab n

Settings in the Auto-Formatting dialog box: l

The UK and Canadian postcodes option

What files are synchronized

The following table explains how and when individual files are copied or updated to the master Roaming User Profile or to the local cache when the Master and Local Roaming User

Profiles are synchronized.

For more information on what options affect what data gets synchronized between the Master

and Local Roaming User Profile, see Setting/selecting Roaming User Profile options.

These options can affect how much data is transferred across your network when the Master

and Local Roaming User Profiles are synchronized. For more information, see Estimating

Network traffic caused by synchronization

.

129


File name or type

Acoustic files:*.usr and *.sig

Vocabulary files:*.voc

Acoustic archive created for each dictation session: acarchive.nwv

(encryption disabled), acarchive.enwv

(encryption enabled)

Audio.ini

Copied or updated with the master

Roaming User Profile

At save time if the

Always copy acoustic information to

network option in the

Administrative settings is

on. See Acoustic files for

more details.

Copied only after the acoustic files for the User

Profile have been modified with information from Learn from

specific documents,

Learn from sent e-

mails, Import a list of

words or phrases, and similar procedures.

Copied to session folder if it exists; once master voice_container limit is reached, nothing more is copied. The local copy is deleted and a zero-length file is created.

Backups

DRA files, aco.ini;

Copied or updated to local cache

Copied if version number on server is different

Copied if version number on server is different

Never

Copied to master after running the Check

Microphone wizard or at

User Profile close if not copied successfully after running the

Check Microphone wizard

Copied if version number on server is different; also copied right before Check Microphone wizard is run

Never - Dragon does not backup local Roaming

User Profiles on the enduser workstations and does not backup the

Master Roaming User

Profiles on the location where they are stored on your network.

See Backups

for more details.

Never

Copied to session folder if Never

130


File name or type drafiles.ini

Copied or updated with the master

Roaming User Profile the master voice_ container has space. Files are deleted after being copied; aco.ini and drafiles.ini are recreated at zero-length

Copied when User Profiles are saved, or a User

Profile is closed and saved.

Copied or updated to local cache

Custom commands created on client

PC:Mycmds.dat

Options.ini, soptions.ini, itnoptions.ini

History of changes to the vocabulary: vocdelta.voc

Copied at User Profile close, options dialog close when the timestamp on the local file has changed.

Merged to master copy on

User Profile save and open.

When vocabularies are copied up, vocdelta.voc is reset to zero in the master copy for that topic.

Never (machine dependent)

Copied at User Profile open if version number on server is different

Copied on User Profile open, options dialog open if version number is different on the server

Copied to local cache on User Profile open and merged into the voc if version number is different on the server nsuser.ini, local.ini, nssystem.ini, natspeak.ini

Never

Acoustic files

If the setting is off (the default), after the acoustic optimizer runs on the master Roaming User

Profile, the server incorporates the changes

In Dragon NaturallySpeaking , an end-user can set the Save Acoustic information option to control if Dragon saves the .usr and .sig files on each computer they dictate on. See

"Controlling updates to the acoustic components of a User Profile" in Dragon What's New for administrators for more information.

Backups

It is the responsibility of your local administrator to back up the Master Roaming User Profiles.

However, Dragon does automatically back up local non-Roaming User Profiles on the enduser workstations as specified in the Miscellaneous tab of the Administrative Settings dialog box.

Estimating Network traffic caused by synchronization

The following table explains how and when individual files are copied or updated to the master Roaming User Profile or to the local cache when the Master and Local Roaming User

131


Profiles are synchronized and how much data is transferred in the process.

In addition, this table which option controls whether the data is transferred. For more information on what options affect what data gets synchronized between the Master and

Local Roaming User Profile, see Setting/selecting Roaming User Profile options.

The estimates of the data transferred across the network is for a single Roaming User

Profile.

132


Files copied to the Master


Acoustic files:

*.user and *.sig

User Action:

Dictation, Audio

Setup

Transfer time:

When the User

Profile is saved

Vocabulary files:

*.voc

User Action:

Dictation, Learn from specific documents, Learn from sent e-mails,

Vocabulary

Optimizer.

Transfer time:

Copied only after the vocabulary files for the end-user have been modified with information from

Learn from specific

documents,

Learn from sent

e-mails, and the

Vocabulary

Optimizer. Copied only after saving or closing a User

Profile.

Acoustic archive created for each dictation

session: acarchive.nwv, acarchive.enwv

User Action:

Dictation,

Transfer Direction &

Data Amount

Files copied to the

Local Roaming

User Profile

Administrative Setting to enable for Transfer

68 MB

<---->

21 MB

<---->

Transfer

time:

Copied if server version is different from client version

Transfer

time:

Copied if server version is different from client version n

Always copy acoustic information to network n

Save Acoustic information

Access network at user profile open/close only

240 MB

<------

Transfer

time:

Never.

The local copy is deleted and a zero-

Access network at user profile open/close only

133




Correction

Transfer time:

Copied to session folder if it exists.

Once master voice_container limit is reached, nothing more is copied. Copy only happens after saving or closing a

User Profile.

DRA files created during

dictation: DRA files, aco.ini, drafiles.ini

User Action:

Dictation,

Correction

Transfer time:

Copied to session folder if the master voice_container has space.

Custom commands created on client

PC: Mycmds.dat

User Action:

Changes to some

Options on the local PC

Transfer time:

Copied when a

User Profile is closed or saved.


Data Amount


Local Roaming

User Profile

Administrative Setting to enable for Transfer length file is created after files are copied to the server.

MB/minute

<------

66 K

1.3

<---->

Transfer

time:

Never.

Files are deleted after being copied; aco.ini and drafiles.ini are recreated at zerolength

Transfer

time:

Copied when a

User

Profile opens on the local

PC and the version number on the server is different from the version

Conserve archive size on network

134


.INI file changes

on client PC: options.ini, soptions.ini, itnoptions.ini

User Action:

Changes to some

Options on the local PC

Transfer time:

Copied at User

Profile close,

Options dialog close when the timestamp on the local file has changed

History of changes to the

vocabulary: vocdelta.voc

User Action:

Adding words, changing word properties

Transfer time:

Merged to master copy when a User

Profile is saved or opened. When vocabularies are copied, vocdelta.voc is reset to zero in the master copy for that vocabulary

Log file:

Dragon.log




Data Amount


Local Roaming

User Profile


< 1 k

<---->

500 KB max. (12 bytes/word)

<----> number on the server

Transfer

time:

Copied to local cache on when a

User

Profile opens and merged into the voc if the version number is different on the server

Transfer

time:

Copied when a

User

Profile opens or the

Options dialog opens if the server version is different from the client version

Merge contents of vocdelta.voc into network user profile when file is full

< 1 MB

<------

Transfer

time:

Never

Copy Dragon log to network

135





Data Amount


Local Roaming

User Profile


User Action: Any use of Dragon

Transfer time:

Copied if the

Administrative option is set.

Enabling the Roaming feature on each computer where an end-user will dictate

After you have set up the network location for the Master Roaming User Profiles and installed or upgrading Dragon NaturallySpeaking on the computers in your network, you must enable the Roaming feature on each computer where the end-user will dictate using a

Roaming User Profile.

Step 1: Start Dragon NaturallySpeaking

You must start Dragon NaturallySpeaking to enable the Roaming feature.

Step 2: If already Dragon is running, select Administrative Settings

If Dragon is already running, on the DragonBar, select Tools > Administrative Settings and click Proceed. This action closes all open User Profiles and displays the Administrative

Settings dialog box.

Step 3: Turn on the Roaming feature

After closing any open User Profiles:

1. If Dragon is running, from the DragonBar menu, select Tools > Administrative Set-

tings. This action displays the Administrative Settings dialog box .

Note: You do not have to be running Dragon to act as an administrator of the product. Instead of opening the

Administrative Settings dialog box from the DragonBar menus, you can open the dialog box from the command line by selecting Start > Run, then entering the following command in the Open text box (include a space between natspeak.exe and the

/SetAdministrativeOptions option that follows it):

“C:\Program

136


Files\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\Program\natspeak.exe”/SetAdministrativeOptions

2. On the Roaming tab, check Enable.

3. Click Apply to save the changes and keep the dialog box open.

Note: With the Roaming feature enabled, the Open User Profile dialog box later displays only User Profiles in the Roaming User Profile storage locations. To let the end-users open both local (non-roaming) and Roaming User Profiles, check the Allow non-roaming user

profiles to be opened option in the Administrative Settings dialog box. Clearing this option prevents end-users from dictating with a non-roaming (local) User Profile by mistake.

Step 4: Set the location of Master Roaming User Profiles

On each computer where you plan to have end-users dictating as Roaming users, you must tell that installation of Dragon where the Master Roaming User Profiles are located.

After selecting Enable on the Roaming tab:

1. Click the Add button. The Roaming User Network Location dialog box

displays. You use the Roaming User Network Location dialog box to define the network location of the master Roaming User Profiles. The location you pick must be accessible to all computers on the network that you want available for dictation with Dragon.

2. Set the Display Name to the way the name of the directory should display in other dialog boxes. The display name later appears in the Roaming tab of the

Administrative Settings dialog and the Location of user profile text box of both the Open User Profile and the Manage User Profiles dialog boxes.

3. Set the Network Location. See the types of locations that the Roaming feature supports

in Creating a network storage location for Master Roaming User Profiles .

4. If you are using a web server to store Master Roaming User Profiles, click the

HTTP Settings and SSL Settings (if you are using HTTPS) button to set information about your HTTP and HTTPS connection and proceed with HTTP Settings and SSL Settings for further information. After entering the HTTP and SSL Settings, use the Test

Connection button to make sure your settings are correct. For help troubleshooting a

problem with the connection, see Testing and troubleshooting an HTTP connection .

5. Click OK in the Roaming User Network Location dialog box.

For more information on setting the location of the master Roaming User Profiles, see

Roaming User Network Location .

Note: You cannot create a non-Roaming User Profile on an HTTP connection.

You can only create Roaming User Profiles on an HTTP connection when the

Roaming feature is enabled.

Step 5: Set location of Local Roaming User Profiles

When an end-user opens a Master Roaming User Profile, Dragon transfers a copy of that

User Profile to the local computer. That local copy is called the Local Roaming User Profile.

This is the location on the computer where changes made during a dictation session, such as corrections or new acoustic data, are stored before they are synchronized with the master


You can set this location, called <Roaming Local>, from the Administrative Settings dialog box . Nuance recommends leaving this option at the default setting.

137


Note: the location of <Roaming Local> is per-PC and cannot be changed to an end-userspecific location.

<Roaming Local>

To accept the default <Roaming Local> location (which Nuance recommends), click OK

on the Administrative Settings dialog box . You will be prompted to create the default

directory if it does not already exist. When you see the following message, click Yes.

The default location of <Roaming Local> is: n Windows 7, and Windows 8:

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\RoamingUsers\<display name>\

See Dragon file structure for information about the default location of the RoamingUsers directory for Dragon NaturallySpeaking on other Windows operating systems.

The <display name> is the name you defined for the Master Roaming User Profile location.

You can have multiple network storage locations for your Master Roaming User Profiles and each has its own corresponding directory for Local Roaming User Profiles.

Changing the default location for <Roaming Local>

1. Use the Browse for Folder dialog box to open a location where you want to store the local Roaming User Profile. This is the location on the computer where changes made during a dictation session, such as corrections or new acoustic data are stored before they are synchronized with the master Roaming User Profile.

2. If the directory does not currently exist, click Make New Folder and type a name for the new folder. The new directory can have any name, but calling it something meaningful, such as Local Roaming User Profiles, will make the folder easier to find in the future.

3. Click OK.

Step 6: Set Roaming feature options

The Administrative Settings dialog box also contains several options that affect how the

Roaming feature works. You select the options that indicate how you want a Roaming User

Profile to function at each Roaming User Profile location. For a list of the options to choose

from, refer to Selecting Roaming User Profile options

.

Notes: n

Once you set up an installation of Dragon to use the Roaming feature, end-users on that computer can only open Roaming User Profiles; they cannot open any locally created User Profiles unless you choose the "Allow non-roaming user profiles to

be opened" option. For a list of the options to choose from, refer to Selecting

Roaming User Profile options .

n

If an end-user is dictating with a Roaming User Profile, the Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer Scheduler is disabled on the local end-user's computer. You must run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on the computer where your

138


Master Roaming User Profiles are located or on an administrator’s workstation. For

more information, see Running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer with a


Client Administrative Settings: Roaming tab

You use the Roaming tab of the Administrative Settings dialog box to set up the Roaming feature. You must set up the Roaming feature on each computer where you want end-users to dictate with a Roaming User Profile.

When Roaming is enabled in Administrative Settings by default the Open User Profiles dialog box displays large numbers of User Profiles quickly. They can also be organized into subfolders. See "Creating subfolders for Roaming User Profiles" in the Dragon Help for more information.

Enable

Select Enable to activate the Roaming feature and the Roaming User Profile options.

Network Directories

To set the location of the master Roaming User Profile(s):

1. Click the Add button. You use the Roaming User Network Location dialog box to define the network location of the master Roaming User Profiles. The location you pick must be accessible to all computers on the network that you want available for dictation with Dragon.

2. Set the Display Name and the Address under Network Location. The Roaming feature supports the following types of locations: n

Mapped Drive—the format is: <drive letter>:\<folder name>. For example,

y:\roaming. n

UNC Path—the format is: \\servername\sharename\path\filename.

n

HTTP (http:)—the format is: http://myserver.com/<name_of_ virtualdirectory> where <name_of_virtualdirectory> is the name of the virtual directory set up by an administrator during setup of the IIS or

Apache web site. For HTTP locations, click the HTTP Settings button to set information specific to your HTTP connection. You can also test your connection to the HTTP server from the HTTP Settings dialog box.

n

HTTP with SSL (https:)—the format is: https://myserver.com/<name_of_ virtualdirectory> where <name_of_virtualdirectory> is the name of the virtual directory set up by an administrator during setup of the IIS or

Apache web site. For HTTP with SSL locations, click the SSL Settings button to set information specific to your HTTP with SSL connection. You can also test your connection to the HTTP with SSL server from the SSL


Local directory (for cache)


User Profile to the local computer. The local copy is called the Local Roaming User Profile.

You can change the setting of this location, always called <Roaming Local>.

139


The default location of <Roaming Local> is:

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\RoamingUsers\<display name>\<username>


The <display name> is a name you assigned as a Master Roaming User Profiles location.

You can have multiple network storage locations for your Master Roaming User Profiles.

The <username> is the name of an individual Master Roaming User Profile. There is a separate directory for each User Profile.

Click the Browse button to find or create a new location.

Check Boxes for Roaming User options

The check boxes and other components below the Local directory are the Roaming User

options. You can also configure the Open User Profiles dialog box to display the Classic

Open User Profiles dialog if desired. See Selecting Roaming User Profile options

for details.

Restore Defaults

Returns the Administrative Settings dialog box to the state it had when you first installed

Dragon. Note that the default is to have the Roaming feature turned off.





140


141 n


HTTP Roaming .

n

If you connected to your Roaming User Profile Master Directory over HTTP and you find that not all your User Profiles are listed in the Open User Profile dialog box, or after creating a Roaming User Profile you cannot open it again, or the Open User

Profile dialog box does not display all the vocabularies and acoustic models for your

User Profiles, make sure that you: l


Client Administrative Settings: Roaming User Network

Location

You use the Roaming User Network Location dialog box to define the network location of the master Roaming User Profiles.

The location you pick must be accessible to all computers where end-users will dictate using a


Display Name

Sets the directory name displayed in the following locations:


The Roaming tab of the Administrative Settings dialog box n

The Location of user profile drop-down list in the Open User Profile dialog box.

Note: With the Roaming feature enabled, the Open User Profile dialog box displays only User Profiles in the Roaming User Profile locations. To let the end-users open both local (non-roaming) and Roaming User Profiles, select the Allow non-roaming

user profiles to be opened option on the Administrative Settings dialog box.

Clearing this option prevents end-users from dictating with a non-roaming (local)

User Profile by accident. For more information, see Enabling the Roaming feature on each computer where an end-user will dictate

.

n

The Location of user profile drop-down list in the Manage User Profiles dialog box.

Network Location—Address

On each computer where you plan to have users dictating as Roaming users, you must tell that installation of Dragon where the Master Roaming User Profiles are located.

The Roaming feature supports the following types of locations:

Mapped Drives and UNC Paths

Mapped drives connect to a shared network folder that has a drive letter assigned to it.

UNC paths connect to a shared network folder using the Universal Naming Convention

(UNC) to locate a User Profile. The UNC is a way to identify a shared file on a computer or network without having to know the storage device it is on. The UNC path format is:

\\servername\sharename\path\filename.

To use a mapped drive or UNC path:

1. Under Network Location, enter the address of the mapped drive or UNC path.

You can click Browse to browse for the location of the mapped drive or UNC path. This displays the Browse for Folder dialog box. You can also create a new directory on the mapped drive or UNC path by clicking the Make New Folder button.

2. Click OK when you are done.

Intranet/Internet connections

The Intranet/Internet connection supports both HTTP and HTTP over an encrypted Secure

Sockets Layer (SSL).

To use an Intranet/Internet connection:

1. Under Network Location, enter the URL address of your HTTP or HTTPS server where your master Roaming User Profiles are located.

2. Click n

HTTP Settings...to display the HTTP Settings dialog box, where you can set information specific to your HTTP connection like Authentication,

Firewall, and Proxy Server information. You can also test your connection to the HTTP server from this dialog box. For more information, see HTTP Settings .

n

SSL Settings...to display the SSL Settings dialog box, where you can set information specific to your HTTPS (SSL) connection. You can also

142

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide test your connection to the HTTPS server from this dialog box. For more information, see SSL Settings.

Note: You cannot create a non-Roaming User Profile on an HTTP or HTTPS connection.

You can create only Roaming User Profiles on an HTTP or HTTPS connection and only when the Roaming feature is enabled.

NMS Administrative Settings: Setting Roaming User settings and Data settings

Merge contents of vocdelta.voc into network user profile when file is full

Description here.

Prompt before saving to network location

Description here.

Allow disconnected mode

For Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional users that work off the network. Permits users to log on to a Dragon client when the workstation is not connected to the network, such as when the user is working off-site on a laptop, the network is down, or for some reason the roaming user profiles directory (where the Roaming User Profiles are stored) is unavailable.

If your users never dictate on a laptop, you might want to set this option temporarily before you convert local User Profiles to Roaming User Profiles on the network, and then clear it when you are finished.

If you choose to allow users to dictate in Disconnected mode, do not enable the Remove

local cache data after usage option in the Data settings for the site. If you enable both settings, when the user logs out after dictating in Disconnected mode, the results of the user's dictation end up being deleted from the local cache and all the work lost.

Saving user profiles upon automatic logout

By default the Organization level setting applies.

Select this option to automatically save user profile updates to the master user profile when a user logs out of the system.

Saving the user also saves local acoustics

Select this box to have the client send both the acoustic model updates and the language model updates to the server.

If you do not select this option, the clients sends only the language model updates (changes to words and writing styles related changes) back to the server, not the acoustic model updates (changes based on the user's correction of recognized text).

Access network at user open/close only (Minimizes network traffic)

Integrates changes made in the local user cache profile into the Roaming User Profile only when a user logs out and not while the user is dictating. If you do not select this box, then local changes to user configurable options are immediately transferred to the Roaming User

Profile.

143


Ask before breaking lock on network users

Recommended for UNC and mapped drives. Select to keep the option of maintaining or breaking a network lock when opening a Roaming User Profile. Normally, network locks prevent a user from opening a Roaming User Profile at the same time that another user is opening the profile. While this process does not take a long time, network problems can cause a lock to become "stuck" and not release when the opening process is completed.

When this happens, the next time a user tries to open their profile, the Dragon client displays a message stating that the profile is locked and offering the option of overriding the lock. If you do not want this message to appear and instead always want to break a network lock in this situation, you can clear this option to prevent the message from appearing. Because the presence of a lock can indicate a problem that needs to be addressed, Nuance recommends that you enable this option.

Notes: n

This option is valid for Dragon clients that connect to the Roaming User Profiles location using a mapped drive or UNC drive, but is not supported for users connecting over HTTP. n

Users should be careful when in breaking a locked Roaming User Profile, because if the user breaks a lock on one workstation when a user on another workstation is writing to the Roaming User Profile, breaking the lock may corrupt the profile.

Set audio levels on each machine

Select this box to run the Check your audio settings option from the Accuracy Center window before your first session with a Roaming User Profile. This includes the Volume

Check and the microphone Quality Check. Check this option if your users are dictating on different machines or on a single machine, like a laptop, in many different locations. When a user changes machines or locations, the audio setup data can vary depending on differences in the microphone and sound card, as well as differences in ambient sound levels of each Roaming User Profile location. In situations where Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional detects a significant difference between operating systems, sound cards, microphones, or other hardware, the program will prompt you to run Check your audio

settings even if you do not have this option selected.

Copy Dragon log to network

Select this box to copy the Dragon.log file from the local workstation to the Roaming User

Profile location whenever the program synchronizes the local and roaming user profiles.

Dragon.log contains information that can help diagnose problems that your users might encounter dictating with Dragon clients.

Note: The Dragon.log file will not be copied once the maximum size in the Disk space

reserved for network archive option is reached.

Always copy acoustic information to network

Select to copy the user’s acoustic model to the Roaming User Profile location. The transfer of acoustic information based on this option's setting is not limited by setting the Disk space

reserved for network archive option.

144


Suppress warning for using multicore speech profiles on single core machines

Select to suppress the warning that displays if a user profile with a BestMatch-IV or

BestMatch-IV model loads on a single-core computer.

This option is disabled by default.

NMS Administrative Settings: Setting site HTTP connection settings for Roaming User Profiles

Caution:

If you have never set up a web server before, do not attempt to do so; these instructions assume you have already installed the web server and have experience setting up a web server.

In the Site tab, under the Dragon Professional tab, you enter information about where you store Roaming User Profiles for a site. If you are storing the profiles on a web server, to set up the HTTP settings:

1. Select the Enable Roaming User Profiles option.

2. Beside the text Roaming user profile directories, click the Configure button. Dragon displays the Roaming User Profile Directory Settings window.

3. Click the HTTP Settings tab.

Enter information about your connection in the text boxes under the sections in the dialog box: l

Authentication on page 145

l

Firewall and Proxy Servers on page 146

l

Miscellaneous on page 146

Authentication

Prompt for user and password

Select if users will be prompted for a username/password when they connect to the HTTP server.

Default user/Password

Set to the default username/password needed to connect to the HTTP server. Be sure to put the domain name followed by a backslash in front of the user login name; for example:

Nuance\JWyman. This is not a local login.

Authentication type

Set the type of authentication used on the HTTP server you specified as the Address in the Roaming user profile location dialog box. Select the type that indicates how your server is configured: n

Basic—Choose if the server is configured for Basic authentication, where the username and password are passed over the network as clear text.

145


Digest—Choose if the server is configured for Digest authentication, where the passwords are never transmitted across the Internet in unencrypted form.

Note: For security reasons, be sure that anonymous logins are disabled on the HTTP or

HTTPS server.

Firewall and Proxy Servers

Use proxy server

Select Use proxy server if Dragon workstations are connecting to the httpserver through a proxy server.

Type

Select the type of firewall used on the HTTP server from the drop-down list: n

HTTP —Select for a proxy server that specializes in HTML (web page) transactions. n

Tunnel—Select if client workstations are connecting to the server with tunneling software. n

Socks 4—Select for a SOCKS4 protocol that relays TCP sessions at a firewall host to allow application users transparent access across the firewall.

SOCKS4 does not support authentication, UDP proxy. SOCKS4 clients require full Domain Name Service (DNS). n

Socks 5—Select for a SOCKS 5 protocol that relays TCP sessions at a firewall host to allow Nuance Management Console users transparent access across the firewall. SOCKS 5 supports multiple authentication methods.

SOCKS 5 clients use the SOCKS 5 server to perform the Domain Name

Service (DNS) lookup.

Server

Enter the server name provided by your server administrator.

Port

Enter the port number accessed to connect to the proxy server or firewall.

User

Enter any username needed to log on to the proxy server or firewall.

Password

Enter any password needed to log on to the proxy server or firewall.

Firewall data

Enter any special authentication string provided by your server administrator.

Miscellaneous

146


Follow redirects

If you are storing the Roaming User Profiles on a server that redirects incoming connections to another location, you can define how the Dragon client handles these redirects by selecting one of the check boxes. Nuance recommends that you set redirects to either Always or Same Scheme Only, but always follow them.

n

Never—Never follow redirects; ignores them. n

Always—Always follow redirects.

n

Same Scheme Only—Permit only redirects using the same scheme as the client request.

Keep Connection Alive

Selecting this check box tells the client and server to keep the connection alive after the current session ends. If you have Follow Redirects set to Always or Same Scheme

Only, you should not select this check box.

Lock timeout

Set to the number of seconds the server should wait before breaking the lock on any the

Roaming User Profiles for the logged on user. Setting the lock to 0 uses the default setting from the server. Specifying another time overrides the server default.

A network lock prevents a user from using a Roaming User Profile that another user already has in use. While this process does not take a long time, network problems can cause a lock to become stuck and not release when the login process is completed. When this happens, the next time the user tries to log on with that user account, the user sees a message informing him or her of the lock.

Connection timeout

Set to number of seconds before the NMS Server should close the Dragon client connection to the server either when the connection is idle or after the connection has been open for that duration.

Timeout of inactive

Check if the connection timeout in the previous text box applies when the logged in user has been inactive for the specified time period. Leave unchecked if the timeout applies after time elapses, regardless of activity of the logged in user. Leave the option unchecked only with great caution, as it could close the connection while the Dragon client is accessing the Roaming User Profile and corrupt the profile.

Recommended settings for web servers

For selections, Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional requires you make while installing a particular type of web server, refer to the instructions for installing that web server in the

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Installation Guide.

NMS Administrative Settings: Setting site SSL connection settings for Roaming User Profiles

Caution:

147


If you have never set up a secure web server before, do not attempt to do so; these instructions assume you have already installed the secure web server and have experience setting up a secure web server.

Be sure that you install an SSL certificate that is trusted for directory on every workstation.

You push install the SSL certificate as Trusted Root Certificate Authorities.

In the Site tab, under the Dragon Professional tab, you enter information about where you store Roaming User Profiles. If you are storing the user profiles on a secure web server

(HTTPS) to set up the SSL settings:

1. Select the Enable Roaming User Profiles option.

2. Beside the text Roaming user profile directories, click the Configure button. Dragon displays the Roaming User Profile Directory Settings window.

3. Click SSL Settings.

4. In the SSL Settings tab, you define and configure the connection to your secure web

(HTTPS) server. Enter information about your connection in the text boxes under these sections in the dialog box: l

Certificate store on page 149

l

NMS Administrative Settings: Setting site SSL connection settings for Roaming User

Profiles on page 147

148


Certificate store

In this section, you indicate the type of certificate that provides server identity, certificate, and public key information to clients that try to establish a connection:

Certificate store type

Select the certificate store type used for the client certificate on the local machine: n

User store (default)—Choose if the certificate store is a certificate store owned by the current user. For Java, choose if the certificate store is the name of a JKS (Java

Key Store) file. If the user is OpenSSL, choose if the certificate store is a file that contains the PEM encoded certificate and private key. n

Machine store—Choose if the certificate store is a machine store (not available in

Java or when user is OpenSSL). n

PFX file—Choose if the certificate store is the name of a Private Key Server or

PFX (PKCS12) file containing certificates. If the user is OpenSSL, the file may contain only one certificate and private key. n

PFX Blob—Choose if the certificate store is a string (binary or base64 encoded) representing a certificate store in PFX (PKCS12) format. n

PEM Key—Choose if the certificate store is a string or file name that contains a

Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) encoded certificate and private key. This store type is currently not supported in Java.

Certificate store

Enter the name of the certificate store for the client certificate on the local machine:

The storage location is called the certificate store. A certificate store will often have numerous certificates, possibly issued from a number of a different certification authorities: n

MY—A certificate store holding personal certificates with their associated private keys. n

CA—A certificate store holding Certifying Authority (CA) certificates. n

ROOT—A certificate store holding ROOT certificates. n

SPC—A certificate store holding Software Publisher Certificate (SPC) certificates.

149


Notes: n

If you select PFX file for the Certificate Store Type, for the Certificate Store select Other and enter the name of the file in the associated text box below it. n

If you select PFX Blob for the Certificate Store Type, for the Certificate Store select Other and enter the binary contents of a PFX file (for example, the

PKCS12) in the associated text box below it.

Certificate store password

Enter the password for the Certificate Store on the local machine if one is required.

SSL Protocols

Use general SSL protocols

Use this section to enable/disable the supported security protocols on the HTTPS server. n

TLS1—Version 1 of the Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol. n

SSL3—Version 3 of the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol. n

SSL2—Version 2 of the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol. n

PCT1—Version 1 of the Private Communications Transport (PCT) protocol.

Notes: n

Although a number of sites still support SSL2, Nuance recommends that you disable it because of potential security vulnerabilities. n

If you select Using OpenSSL, this functionality is provided by the Cipher List.

Use Open SSL

Select Using OpenSSL if the HTTPS server uses OpenSSL as a Certificate Authority.

OpenSSL is a free non-commercial implementation of SSL.

When you select Using OpenSSL, you must provide: n

Cipher List—A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL. The cipher list consists of one or more cipher strings separated by colons. n

Certificate Authority File—Name of the file containing the list of certificate authorities (CAs) trusted by your application. The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. n

CA Directory—Path to a directory containing CA certificates. The path set by this property should point to a directory on the server machine containing CA certificates in PEM format.

Recommended settings for SSL web servers

For selections that Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional requires you to make while installing a particular type of secure web server, refer to the instructions for installing that secure web server in the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional Installation Guide.

150


Testing and troubleshooting an HTTP connection

Once you have supplied all the necessary information needed to connect to your HTTP server, press the Test Connection button. The Test Connection button tests the

connection to your HTTP server based on the information you supplied in the Roaming User

Network Location and

HTTP Settings dialog boxes.

Troubleshooting test connections

The table below lists the possible messages you might receive after pressing the Test

Connection button.

151


Message

Connection test successful!

Could not connect to the network location.

Could not copy a file to the network location

Could not create a directory on the network location

Could not delete a file from the network location

Could not delete a directory from the network location

Could not copy files into a directory created on the network location

Could not list the contents of a directory created on the network location

Contents of newly created directory

TempDir were incorrect

Could not copy a file from the network

Solution n

None—test successful. n

Check spelling and syntax of the HTTP address in the

HTTP Settings dialog.

n

Check your local network for problems. n

Check create and write privileges on the server n

WebDav Server not installed or active. For more inform-

ation, see Configuring Internet Information Services and

WebDAV for HTTP Roaming

.

n

Check the create directory privileges on the server for the Master Roaming directory. n

Check the privileges for creating sub-directories under the Master Roaming directory. n

Check permissions on the Master Roaming directory.

The end-user must have read, write, and modify privileges n

Check that privileges are inherited in the sub-directories.

n




n


The end-user must have read, write, and modify privileges.

n

Check for authentication time-out on your server.

n

Check your local network for problems. n




n

Caused by an incomplete directory listing. Try again. If the problem persists, check the condition of your network.

n

Check permissions on the Local Master Roaming directory.

152


Message location

Solution n

Check that the Local Master Roaming directory exists.

n

MIME types not set to *.* (the file is .txt).

n

Apache: Make sure DavDepthInfinity directive is set to

"on" for Master Roaming directory.

Could not get the size of a newly created directory on the network location.

Could not rename a file on the network location

Could not rename a directory on the network location

Could not copy a directory within the network location n




n




n




Setting and selecting Roaming User Profile options

The Administrative Settings dialog box also contains several options that you can choose from to indicate how you want a Roaming User Profile to function at each Roaming User

Profile location.

These options can affect how much data is transferred across your network when the Master

and Local Roaming User Profiles are synchronized. For more information, see Estimating

Network traffic caused by synchronization

and How Dragon Synchronizes Master and Local

Roaming User Profiles .

Roaming User Profile options on the Administrative Settings dialog box

Display Classic Open User Profiles dialog

Enable this option to display the Classic Open User Profiles dialog box. The setting configures the Open User Profiles dialog box to display only folders that contain actual

Dragon User Profiles in the Location of User Profiles box.

Note:

For faster performance at large sites with Roaming User Profile directories, Nuance recommends using the default appearance for the Open User Profiles dialog box.

Displaying the Classic Open User Profiles dialog box takes longer because Dragon first

153

Chapter 8: Configuring and using the Roaming feature and Roaming User Profiles verifies that directories contain valid Dragon User Profiles. Directory structures do not display with the Classic setting.

Allow non-Roaming User Profiles to be opened

Select this box to permit the end-user to open non-Roaming (local) User Profiles. Nuance recommends clearing this option to prevent anyone from dictating with a non-Roaming

(local) User Profile by accident.

Merge contents of vocdelta.voc into network user profile when file is full

Select this box to copy the contents of the local vocdelta.voc file to the master Roaming

User Profile without running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer.

If you do not set this option and if you have not run the Acoustic and Language Model

Optimizer for a long time, the end-user will see a message when the vocdelta.voc file becomes full. If you do not run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer regularly, you should set this option to prevent end-users from seeing this message.

Vocdelta.voc is the file used to store vocabulary changes in the Master Roaming User

Profile. It is updated whenever a Local Roaming User Profile is closed, and it is used to update the Local Roaming User Profile with vocabulary changes every time that a User

Profile is opened. When you run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on the Master

Roaming User Profile, Dragon incorporates the contents of vocdelta.voc into the vocabulary

(.voc) file and clears the content of vocdelta.voc.

If you check this setting, Dragon monitors the size of the vocdelta.voc file. When the

vocdelta.voc file reaches 90% of its maximum size (500 KB), Dragon incorporates the contents of the vocdelta.voc file into the vocabulary (.voc) file and clears vocdelta.voc.

This operation occurs when the end-user opens the local Roaming User Profile. This operation can take a long time because the vocabulary file must be transferred over the network twice. Subsequently, opening the local Roaming User Profile on another workstation can also take a long time because the entire vocabulary file must be copied from the master to the local Roaming User Profile.

Selecting this option will transfer at maximum 500 KB, or 12 bytes/word across the network at synchronization if the Roaming and Local copies are different.

Access network at user profile open/close only

Select this box to synchronize changes made to the local Roaming User Profile to the

Master Roaming User Profile only when a local Roaming User Profile opens or closes. If this box is not selected, then these local changes are immediately transferred to the Master

Roaming User Profile. The only changes affected by this setting are the changes an enduser makes locally from the Options dialog box, therefore this setting is highly unlikely to have a perceptible impact on Dragon’s performance.

At synchronization, setting this option will copy approximately n

21 MB of vocabulary files (*.voc). n

240 MB of acoustic archive files create for each dictation session (acarchive.nwv and acarchive.enwv).

Note: These files are only copied from the Local to the Roaming User Profile; they are never copied from the Roaming User Profile to the local User Profile.

These files synchronize across the network when:

154


Vocabulary files - when the local end-user modifies the vocabulary with information from the Learn from specific documents, Learn from sent e-mails, or Vocabulary

Optimizer dialogs or when the Roaming and Local copies are different.

n

Acoustic archive files - these files will be copied to session folder if it exists. Once the master voice_container limit is reached, nothing more is copied.

Ask before breaking locks on network user profiles (recommended for UNC and mapped drives)

Select this box to keep the option of maintaining or breaking a network lock when opening a

Roaming User Profile. Normally, network locks prevent anyone from opening a Roaming

User Profile at the same time someone else is opening that User Profile. While this process does not take a long time, network problems can cause a lock to become "stuck" and not release when the opening process is completed. When this happens, the next time anyone tries to open that User Profile, Dragon displays a message stating that the User Profile is locked and giving them the option of overriding it. If you do not want this message displaying and always want to break a network lock in this situation, you can clear this option to prevent the message from appearing. Because the presence of a lock can indicate a problem that needs to be addressed, Nuance recommends that you enable this option.

Notes: n

This option is valid for users connecting to the Master Roaming User Profile location using a mapped drive or UNC drive, but is not supported for users connecting over

HTTP. n

Be careful when in breaking a locked Roaming User Profile. For example, if you break a lock when another end-user is writing to the Master Roaming User Profile, breaking the lock may corrupt the Master Roaming User Profiles.

n

If an end-user opens a Roaming User Profile while the Acoustic and Language Model

Optimizer is running on the Master Roaming User Profile, the end-user will see a message but can continue.

Set audio levels on each machine (recommended)

Select this box to run the Check your microphone option from the Accuracy Center window before your first session with a Roaming User Profile. This includes the Volume

Check and the microphone Quality Check. Check this option if your users are dictating on different computers or on a single computer, like a laptop, in many different locations. When an end-user changes computers or locations, the audio setup data can vary depending on differences in the microphone and sound card, as well as differences in ambient sound levels of each Roaming User Profile location. In situations where Dragon detects a significant difference between operating systems, sound cards, microphones, or other hardware, the program will prompt you to run Check your microphone even if you do not have this option selected.

Save acoustic information

An end-user selects the Save acoustic information option to make sure that their acoustic information is saved along with their local User Profile. By saving the acoustic information, the end-user ensures that any corrections they make will be available after they close and reopen the User Profile. This option also makes sure that these corrections will be synchronized between the Local and Master Roaming User Profile if the end-user also enables the Always

copy acoustic information to network option.

155


The Save acoustic information option is turned on by default

Prompt before saving to network location

An administrator can set the Prompt before saving to network location option to let endusers choose where to save their User Profile. When an administrator enables this option, and an end-user attempts to close Dragon or turn off or log off the operating system, a dialog box appears that lets the end-user choose to save their profile locally or to the master network location. An end-user can save their profile locally if they are on a slow network. An end-user can save their profile to the master location to ensure any updates to their profile are available at other network locations.

Copy Dragon Log to Network

Select this box to copy the Dragon.log file from the local workstation to the master Roaming

User Profile location whenever the program synchronizes the local and master Roaming

User Profile. Dragon.log contains information that can help to diagnose problems that your users might encounter using Dragon.

Note: The Dragon.log file will not be copied once the maximum size is reached in the Disk

space reserved for network archive option.

Selecting this option can increase how long it takes to close a Roaming User Profile. It can also limit the usefulness of the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer because it reduces the amount of acoustic data that can be stored in the network archive. Nuance recommends that you not set this option unless requested by Nuance Technical Support.

Selecting this option will transfer 1 MB or less of data across the network at synchronization.

These files are only copied from the Local Roaming User Profile to the Master Roaming

User Profile; they are never copied from the Master Roaming User Profile to the Local


Always copy acoustic information to network

Select this box to copy the User Profile’s acoustic model (.usr and .sig files) to the Master

Roaming User Profile location.

If you chose not to copy the User Profile’s acoustic information to the network, updates to the acoustic model that you make on one computer (for example by correcting and training words) will not be available on other computers used by that particular Roaming User Profile until you run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on the Master Roaming User

Profile location and the Local and Master Roaming User Profiles synchronize. Therefore, if you do not run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on the Master Roaming

User Profiles regularly, you should set this option.

By always copying the acoustic information to the Master Roaming User Profile location, you ensure these accuracy improvements will be available when the Master Roaming User

Profile is opened from another location. However, setting this option can increase the amount of time it takes to close a Roaming User Profile.

In Dragon NaturallySpeaking, an end-user can set the Save Acoustic information option to control if Dragon saves the .usr and .sig files on each computer they dictate on.

See "Controlling updates to the acoustic components of a User Profile" in Dragon - What's

New for administrators for more information.

156


The transfer of acoustic information based on this option's setting is not limited by setting the

Disk space reserved for network archive option.

Setting this option will copy approximately 15 MB across the network at synchronization if the

Roaming and Local copies are different.

Conserve archive size on network

Select this box to prevent copying of .DRA files (files that contain the acoustic data from the latest dictation session) to the Master Roaming User Profile location when the program synchronizes the Local and Master Roaming User Profiles. Leaving this box unchecked allows the local .DRA files to synchronize with the Master Roaming User Profile, which makes the .DRA files available to the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer when it is run on the Master Roaming User Profile locations and provides increased accuracy.

However, because .DRA files can be large, if you experience excessive network slowdowns, checking this option may solve the problem by eliminating the copying of these files each time the Master and Local Roaming User Profiles synchronize. You can still run the Acoustic and

Language Model Optimizer on the Master Roaming User Profile, but since it will not have the .DRA files to process, the accuracy gains will be less.

Note: The .DRA files will not be copied once the maximum size is reached in the Disk space

reserved for network archive option.

At synchronization, setting this option will copy approximately 1.3 MB for each minute of dictation saved in the .DRA files. These files are only copied from the Local Roaming User

Profile to the Master Roaming User Profile; they are never copied from the Master Roaming

User Profile to the Local Roaming User Profile.

Disk space reserved for network archive

Use this option to specify the maximum size of the directory containing the acoustic data (the

.dra and the log files) available to the Acoustic Optimizer. By default the archive size is 1000

MB per dictation source. To conserve space, you can reduce the default size and select the

Conserve archive size on network option.

Converting a non-roaming local User Profile into a


You can convert an existing non-roaming local User Profile to a Roaming User Profile from the Manage User Profiles dialog box. Converting a non-roaming local User Profile copies that User Profile to the Master Roaming User Profile location.

To convert a non-Roaming User Profile to a Roaming User Profile:

1. Select Profile > Manage User Profiles from the DragonBar. This action displays the

Manager User Profiles dialog box.

2. In the Location of user profile drop-down list at the bottom of the dialog box, select the non-roaming local location of your User Profiles. Now the list under User Profiles should include all the non-roaming local User Profiles that you can convert to Master Roaming

User Profiles.

3. Select the non-roaming local User Profiles you want to convert to a Master Roaming User

Profile.

157


4. Click the Advanced button and then select Copy to Roaming from the menu that pops up. The Copy to Roaming dialog box appears.

5. Under Select Roaming Master Location to save the user, select the appropriate

Master Roaming User Profile location from the drop-down list. In the Choose sub-

directory if wanted field, you can select a subdirectory within the Roaming Master location. When finished, click OK. A Master Roaming User Profile location appears in this list only if it is currently available to the local computer.

6. Repeat the process for any other non-roaming local User Profiles you want to convert to

Master Roaming User Profiles.

Using multiple dictation sources with a single User

Profile

It is possible to have a variety of dictation sources (audio input devices) for a single set of

User Profiles so that the speaker can deploy various microphones or portable recording

devices. This ability is especially useful with the Roaming feature

. By allowing multiple dictation sources, you can still have the same User Profiles for each location regardless of the microphone type.

To add a new dictation source to a User Profile

1. In the Open User Profile dialog box, select the User Profile to dictate with the new dictation source.

2. Click the Source button and then click New. The New Dictation Source dialog box appears.

3. Select a new input device for dictation from the list on the New Dictation Source dialog box. You can choose from among different microphone or recorder types.

4. Click OK. You return to the Open User Profile dialog box.

5. Select the User Profile you just created and click Open. If you have not previously trained the User Profile with the new dictation source, the Profile Creation wizard appears and you can begin training.

Running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer for

Roaming User Profiles

When the Roaming feature is enabled on a workstation, that workstation cannot run the

Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer or the Acoustic and Language Model

Optimizer Scheduler because the optimizer or scheduler can only be run on the Master

Roaming User Profile. Later, any optimizations done by the Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer are copied to each Local Roaming User Profile when synchronization

occurs.

The system administrator is responsible for running the Acoustic and Language Model

Optimizer on the network location of the Master Roaming User Profiles. The administrator can install Dragon on the computer where the Master Roaming User Profiles are located or an administrator's computer that has network access to the Master Roaming User Profiles and run the Scheduler for the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer. If possible, the

158

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide administrator’s workstation should be co-located with the server because a large amount of data needs to be transferred between the server and the workstation running the optimizer.

Note: You must have Windows Administrator privileges on the computer where you are running the Scheduler for the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer.

Running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on a multi-core computer

To make sure that corrections and accuracy improvements that end-users make are applied to their Roaming User Profile, an administrator should run the Acoustic and Language Model

Optimizer on Roaming User Profiles only on a multi-core computer.

Running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on a User Profile with two acoustic models

If the computer that an end-user dictates on meets certain system requirements, Dragon

NaturallySpeaking can use two acoustic models (instead of one) with a User Profile. Using two acoustic models instead of one increases recognition and dictation accuracy. Acoustic models that can be added in pairs to a User Profile are called Two-pass models.

See Using multiple acoustic models with a User Profile

for more information.

To run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer to optimize Roaming User Profiles

1. Be sure that a copy of Dragon is installed on the computer where you plan to run the

Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer. Also be sure that the Roaming feature is not enabled.

2. On the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Dragon NaturallySpeaking >

Dragon NaturallySpeaking Tools > Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer

Scheduler to start the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer Scheduler.

3. Access the master directory of the Roaming User Profiles you want to optimize: select File

> Set Speaker Directory from the menu of the Acoustic and Language Model Optim-

izer Scheduler window. In the Set User Profile Directory dialog box, either enter the path of the directory or click the Browse button. If the User Profiles you want to optimize are located in multiple directories, you can change directories to locate the additional User

Profiles.

4. Select the User Profile(s) you want to optimize and set a schedule for running the Acous-

tic and Language Model Optimizer. For specific instructions, click the Help button in the window.

Controlling access to User Profiles

If you have multiple Dragon end-users on an end-user workstation, those end-users will have multiple User Profiles to choose from in Dragon's Open User Profile dialog box.

If you use a shared directory for User Profiles, whether they are roaming or non-roaming, you may be concerned about the ability of an end-user to see and/or open another end-user’s

159

Chapter 8: Configuring and using the Roaming feature and Roaming User Profiles profile as well as their ability to open the correct profile. There are several ways to address this concern: n

Many of Nuance’s customers address this concern simply through end-user training.

Each end-user should be aware that if they open another end-user’s profile and try to use it, their accuracy will be poor and end-user-specific customizations will not be available. Therefore, each end-user has an incentive to use only their own profile.

However, this fact doesn't prevent a malicious end-user from damaging another enduser’s profile. n

If end-users always log into Windows with a unique Windows user ID, you can use

Windows file permissions to control access to the files. Typically, you do this by granting Full Control or Read/Write/Modify access to the shared directory, but do not allow this permission to propagate to sub-directories. That way, each end-user becomes the creator owner of any Dragon User Profile that he or she creates. Endusers can still see all of the Dragon User Profiles in the Open User Profile dialog box, but if they try to select another end-user’s profile, a message will appear saying that they do not have permission to access that profile. Apply similar file permissions to the local copy of each Roaming User Profile; the default location for local copies is under

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\RoamingUsers

for Windows

7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008. n

If end-users log in using a shared Windows user ID, the best way to control access is through HTTP Roaming. In this configuration, you set up a web server running either

IIS or Apache and with the WebDAV file system enabled. On each workstation, you specify a URL on the web server as the Roaming User Profile location. When an enduser launches Dragon, before displaying the Open User Profile dialog it prompts for a user name and password, which it uses to authenticate against the web server.

You can use file permissions on the web server to specify which User Profiles are accessible to each account on the web server. File security is a function of the web server and the WebDAV software.

Making it easier for end-users to select their User Profiles

As described above, the Dragon Open User Profile dialog shows a list of all of the User

Profiles in a shared directory (unless you are using HTTP Roaming to limit access to User

Profiles). If there are more User Profiles than will fit on one screen, you can train end-users to go directly to a specific User Profile by typing the first few letters of its name.

In Dragon NaturallySpeaking , you can display and view groups of User Profiles in a treestyle structure. See "Open User Profiles dialog box optimized for Roaming" in Dragon -

What's New for administrators for more information.





160


161 n


HTTP Roaming .

n



Configuring Internet Information Services and WebDAV for HTTP Roaming

Here we discuss how to configure Internet Information Services (IIS) and Dragon

NaturallySpeaking to allow you to use WebDAV shares as http roaming users profile locations.

You must perform two steps to use IIS and WebDAV for Dragon HTTP Roaming:

1.

Configuring Internet Information Services and WebDAV

2.

Configuring Dragon internet roaming


Configuring Internet Information Services and WebDAV

To run WebDAV, you must install Internet Information Services (IIS) 7 or greater on a server operating system such as Windows Server 2008.

In this section we discuss installing and configuring WebDAV on IIS 7.0.

Installing and configuring WebDAV on Internet Information Services 7.0

Internet Information Services 7.0 - Install WebDAV

1. Install WebDAV on the IIS 7 server. For more information, see http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc431377.aspx

Internet Information Services 7.0 - Configuring WebDAV

1. Create a virtual directory that points to the Roaming User directory. For more information, see http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb763173.aspx

2. Enable Basic Authentication for the Roaming User directory. For more information, see: http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc733010(WS.10).aspx

3. In the IIS Manager, select Default Web Site in the left pane.

4. In the main view, double-click WebDAV Authoring Rules.

5. Select WebDAV Settings.

6. In the WebDAV Settings page, under Authoring Behavior, set the Allow Unknown

MIME Types property to True.

7. Under Property Behavior, set the Allow Custom Properties and Allow Property

Queries with Infinite Depth properties to True.

162


163

8. Click Apply to save the changes.

9. Make sure that the files in your Roaming User Profile directory are not locked, password protected, or otherwise restricted for access by server permissions.

Configuring Dragon internet roaming

Perform the following steps to configure Dragon internet roaming on all workstations.

1. Start Dragon NaturallySpeaking .

2. Open the Administrative Settings dialog. On the Dragon Bar, select Tools > Admin-

istrative Settings.

3. In the Roaming tab, select Enable.

4. Click the Add button to add a new network location.

5. Set the Display Name and the Network Location. The Roaming User Network Location dialog box displays examples of what you can enter in the Address field.

l

For HTTP locations, you can click the HTTP Settings button to set information specific to your HTTP connection like Authentication, Firewall, and Proxy Server information.

Nuance strongly recommends that you test your connection to the HTTP server from the HTTP Settings dialog box.

Chapter 9: Using Dragon through a remote desktop connection

This section contains information on using Dragon through a remote desktop connection, including support for using the PowerMic II and Terminal Services.

You can connect to Dragon on a remote computer from the following client operating systems: n

Windows 7 (all editions), 32-bit and 64-bit n

Windows 8 (all editions), 32-bit and 64-bit

You can run Dragon on remote computers that run the following operating systems: n

Windows Server 2008 R2 n

Windows 7 Ultimate and Enterprise n

Windows 8 Professional and Enterprise n

Windows Server 2012

164

Chapter 10: Managing Dragon

Clients

From the NMS Server, you can manage individual client computers. The process of managing clients can begin with installing the client using the Nuance Management

Console, then setting several options for the client. You can take several actions to manage clients:

System Requirements for Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional

Hardware Recommendations

Dragon Client Hardware Recommendations

CPU: 2.4 GHz Intel Dual Core or equivalent AMD processor. (IMPORTANT: SSE2 instruction set required)

Processor Cache: 2 MB

DVD-ROM: drive required for installation

Sound Card: Creative® Labs Sound Blaster® 16 or equivalent sound card supporting 16-bit recording.

Free hard disk space: 5 GB required, 8 GB recommended

RAM: n

2 GB RAM for Microsoft® Windows XP®*.

n

4 GB for Microsoft® Windows Vista® 32-bit and 64-bit, Microsoft® Windows® 7 32-bit and

64-bit, Microsoft® Windows® 8 and 8.1 32-bit and 64-bit, Windows Server 2008 64-bit,

Windows Server 2012 64-bit, and Windows Server 2012 64-bit R2.

Microphone: Nuance-approved microphone (included in purchase)

For details on Bluetooth microphones, recorders, Tablet PCs, and other hardware, please go to http://support.nuance.com/compatibility/ .

166


You can also use an iOS or Android device as a microphone using the Dragon Remote

Microphone app.

Bluetooth (Optional): For Bluetooth wireless microphone support, visit http://support.nuance.com/compatibility/

Web Connection: A web connection is required for activation during installation.

Software Requirements

Software Requirements for the Dragon Client

The Dragon Client installer checks your system for minimum requirements. If the minimum requirements are not met, the installer will not install the client.

Operating system: n

Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 32 bit and 64 bit n

Microsoft® Windows® 8 (including Professional and Enterprise), 32 bit and 64 bit n

Microsoft® Windows® 7, 32-bit and 64-bit n

Microsoft® Windows Vista® Service Pack 2, 32-bit and 64-bit n

Microsoft® Windows XP® Service Pack 3, 32-bit only* n

Microsoft® Windows Server 2008, Service Pack 1, Service Pack 2 n

Microsoft® Windows Server 2008 R2, 32-bit and 64-bit n

Microsoft® Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit Service Pack 2 n

Microsoft® Windows Server 2012 n

Microsoft® Windows Server 2012 R2

Supported Virtual Desktop Infrastructure n

XenApp 7.6

n

XenDesktop 7.6

Supported Applications

Once you have installed Dragon Professional, you can use it to control the following applications using your voice: n

WordPad n

NotePad n

Microsoft® Word 2007, 2010 (32 & 64 bit), 2013 (32 & 64 bit) n

Microsoft® Outlook® 2007, 2010, 2013 n

Microsoft® Excel® 2007, 2010, 2013 n

WordPerfect® x5, x6 n

Apache OpenOffice Writer 3.4

n

Open Office Writer v3.1, 3.2

n

Internet Explorer 8, 9, 10, 11 (11 supported when Enhanced Protective Mode is disabled) n

Rich Internet Application IE8, IE9, IE10, IE11 n

Mozilla® Firefox® 8+

167

Chapter 10: Managing Dragon Clients n

Rich Internet Application Firefox® 12+ n

Rich Internet Application Google Chrome 16+ n

Windows Live Mail v15 & v16 n

Mozilla® Thunderbird™ x3 and up n

Lotus Notes 8.5

Setting general auto-formatting options in the client or the Nuance Management Server

Typically, NMS Server administrators set all formatting options in the Groups Details >

Dragon Professional > Auto-Formatting tab or the User Account Details > Dragon

Professional > Auto-Formatting tab.

However, users can use the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional client to override

Auto-Formatting options.

If a user changes Auto-Formatting options in the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional client, the user's changes override the administrator's settings, unless an administrator subsequently makes changes to them. Basically, the Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional client applies the Auto-Formatting option settings of the last person that changed those option settings—whether that person was a user or an administrator.

Status of General Formatting settings on recently reconnected laptops

By default, if a user does not change them, General Formatting options automatically take the values last set by the NMS Server administrator in the Nuance Management Console.

If the administrator changes them at any time, new General Formatting option settings take effect as soon as a user logs in to the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional client.

If a user has been dictating in Disconnected mode (off-site or otherwise off the network), the

General Formatting option settings from the NMS Server take effect as soon as the user again plugs the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional client machine in to the network.

Starting the Dragon Clientfrom Command Line

On any workstation that has the Dragon Client installed, you can start the client from the command line:

1. Select Start > Run... and enter cmd in the Run dialog box that pops up.

2. Switch directories to the following path: (use Program files (x86) for x64 systems)

<drive>:\Program Files\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking12\Program

3. Enter the command line shown below, passing either the -user option or the /user option followed by the user name and password, in that order. The user name and password must be from a user account created on the NMS Server: natspeak.exe /user <username> <password>

4. The password is optional if a provider does not have a password, but Nuance recommends that you assign all providers using Dragon Medical a password.

168


6. You can also use natspeak to install the client from the command line. To receive diagnostic messages about the Dragon Client installation process, you can use the diagnostic option shown below: natspeak.exe /diagnose

When you use the /diagnose option, Dragon Medical sends any information about errors that occur during the installation into the Dragon.log file.

Closing the Dragon Client from a command line

Closing Dragon from a command line is the same as closing Dragon from the Dragonbar menu and closes all Dragon related processes.

This feature is useful for customers that use Dragon in a virtual environment as it allows administrators to close Dragon without using the Task Manager.

1. Select Start > Run... and enter cmd in the Run dialog box that pops up.

2. Switch directories to the following path: (use Program files (x86) for x64 systems)

<drive>:\Program Files\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking12\Program

3. To close Dragon without saving user profile changes, enter the command line shown below. This command works even if the Automatically save user files on close option is enabled in the Dragon client.

natspeak.exe /ShutDown

4. To close Dragon and save user profile changes, enter the command line shown below.

This command works even if the Automatically save user files on close option is disabled in the Dragon client.

natspeak.exe /SaveandShutDown

Notes: n

If Dragon is running and a user profile is not open, running natspeak.exe /ShutDown or natspeak.exe /SaveandShutDown simply closes Dragon and all related processes.

n

If Dragon is running and a user profile is open, running natspeak.exe /ShutDown closes Dragon and all related processes and does not save user profile changes.

n

If Dragon is running and a user profile is open, running natspeak.exe

/SaveandShutDown closes Dragon and all related processes and saves user profile changes.

Running natspeak.exe/ShutDown during General Training

If natspeak.exe /ShutDown executes while the General training wizard is running, Dragon displays a dialog box that asks the end-user if they want to interrupt the training session without saving changes.

169

Chapter 10: Managing Dragon Clients

Workaround 1

1. The Dragon end-user provides a 'Yes' response in the dialog. This closes the General

Training wizard.

2. The Dragon end-user closes and re-starts Dragon.

Workaround 2

1. The Dragon user does not respond to the dialog box. After few seconds, Dragon hides and re-displays the dialog box several times until the DragonBar becomes hidden.

2. The Dragon user closes the General Training wizard.

3. The Dragon end-user closes and re-starts Dragon.

Viewing user activity

As an NMS Server administrator, you need to be aware of the activities of users in your

Network. The Nuance Management Console provides several ways to view this information: n

To view all the users (both NMC Administrators and Dragon Professional Authors)

in your system or to find a particular user, see Viewing, modifying, and deleting user accounts .

n

To view how often users log on to and log out of the system see Auditing Events on page

170

n

To view Dragon log files see Viewing Dragon log files on page 246

Auditing Events

The Nuance Management Console provides the Audit Events utility for you to track the activity of dictating using Dragon Client or other administrators accessing the NMS Server.

Viewing how often users or administrators log in or out of the system

170


1. On the menu bar, click Utilities and then click the Audit Events icon

2. On the Events screen, enter information in the following fields: l

Start date/time: The start date and time for the search. This is a required field.

l

End date/time: The end date and time for the search. This is a required field. l

Organization: The Organization to search on. This is a required field.

l

User login: The user login associated with the events.

3. Click the magnifying glass. The Events screen displays the list of audit events that match the search criteria.



A status bar at the bottom right of the screen displays: n

The number of rows on the screen, for example: .

n An icon that refreshes the search results .

n

The save icon.

i. Press the icon.



Audit Event messages

The list of audit event messages gives the date and time that each session start/end event occurred, the login name of the user who triggered the event, and the organization of that user. You can sort the list using any of the columns. For example: To sort the list by user account, click the User Account column heading. To reverse the sort order, click the column heading a second time.

The following table shows the four types of audit event messages that you may see:

Description

When the user logged on to the system

Audit Event Message

Session begins for user <user name>, application

<application name>, on computer <computer name>

Session ends for user <user name>, application


Session timed out for user <user name>, application

<application name>, on computer <computer name>, session was idle for more than 10 minutes.

Session refused for user <user name>, application


171

When the user logged out of the system

When the user was automatically logged out by the system because the session timed out.

When the user's attempt to log on to the system was not successful

Chapter 11: Managing messages

This chapter explains how you can receive, review, and respond to notifications about licenses and more.

Security of NuanceLink servers

NuanceLink messages include descriptive information for a wide range of updates.

Prior to NMS 4.1, NuanceLink messages included the following descriptive information: n

NMC Medication Updates—Vocabulary update files that contain names of new medications n

NMC Command Updates—Command update files that contain new custom medical commands n

Dragon Client Updates—Update files for the Dragon client.

n

Dragon Medical 360| Network Edition—Update files for the DNS Professional.

In NMS 4.1, each message contains the following details: n

Text of Message: A new software update for package <update_Type> has been delivered to your Nuance Management Server. Where update_Type is one of: l

NMC Medication Updates l

Software Updates l

Notifications l

NMC Command Updates n

Description: A description of the update.

n

Details: (NMC Medication Updates and Software Updates only) - The title and size of the update.

n

File downloaded to: The file download location.

Viewing unread messages and pending approvals

When you log into the Nuance Management Console, the main page contains indicators that show the number of unread messages and pending approvals that you have.The indicators appear in the upper right corner of the main page,to the left of the Help icon.

172


The value in the parenthesis indicates the number of unread messages or pending approvals for you to review.

n

To view unread messages, click Messages.

n

To view pending approvals, click Approval.

Receiving notifications from the NuanceLink

You view messages sent to the NMS Server in the Messages tab in the Nuance

Management Console.

The list of messages resembles an email inbox. The message list updates on login and every hour or when you manually refresh the list by clicking the Refresh link to the lower right.

Opening/viewing the list of messages

To open the list of messages that the NMS Server has received:

1. On the menu bar, click Utilities.

2. In the Utilities ribbon, click the Messages icon in the ribbon. A Messages screen opens below the ribbon, displaying a list of existing messages. Initially this list of messages shows only unread messages. To mark a message as read, check the box to the right of the message and click the Mark complete button on the right-side of the screen. The NMS Server hides the message to as long as you have the

Unread Messages radio button (top-right of the screen) selected.

3. If you want to again view a message or messages that you marked complete and no longer see in the list, click the All Messages option to the far right above the list.

4. You can also sort the messages in the list by clicking the column heading that contains the information to sort by. You click the column heading once to sort in ascending order and click it.

5. Other actions you can perform with messages: l

Check All—Click this button to select all messages in the Messages screen.

l

Uncheck All—Click this button to de-select all messages in the Messages screen.

l

Mark complete—Click this button to mark all selected messages as read.

Understanding types of messages

NMS receives

These are the types of messages the NMS Server receives from NuanceLink: n

License expiration messages.

n

License update messages.

173

Chapter 11: Managing messages

Responding to license expiration messages

A process that checks to see if you have licenses that are about to expire runs every day at

12:01 AM. When a user license is about to expire, you should receive a message in the

Messages tab 30 days in advance of the expiration date.

To open the Messages tab:

1. On the menu bar, click Utilities.

2. Under the Utilities tab, click the Messages icon in the ribbon. A Messages tab opens below the ribbon, displaying a list of existing messages.

3. The Message Text column displays a message about a new software update having been delivered to the NMS server.

4. If you would like to indicate that you have read the message, check the box to the right of the message and click the Mark complete button on the right-side of the screen. The

NMS Server hides the message to as long as you have the Unread Messages radio button (top-right of the screen) selected.

5. Other actions you can perform with messages: l

Check All—Click this button to select all messages in the Messages screen.

l

Uncheck All—Click this button to de-select all messages in the Messages screen.

l

Mark complete—Click this button to mark all selected messages as read.

6. If you would like to renew the licenses before they expire, see the instructions under

Receiving expiration alerts and renewing licenses on page 97.

Purging messages

The NMS Server purges messages about updates and approvals of updates from the Messages and Approval lists after 30 days by default.

This process occurs automatically and you receive an event message telling you that the action is beginning, then another telling you that it has completed. You can monitor event messages in the Audit Events page. The NMS Server also purges these Event messages after 30 days by default.

Messages that have not been read by you or another administrator are never deleted.

If you would like to retain messages for fewer or more than 30 days, you can change the schedule for purging messages.

Changing the Schedule for Purging Messages

To change the number of days to retain messages in the Messages and Approval screens or messages in the Audit Events tab, take these steps:

1. On the menu bar, click Sites, then click the Organizations Overview icon.

2. In the Organizations ribbon, click Details.

3. On the Organizations Details screen, click Products.

4. Expand the Nuance Management Server section.

5. Modify the number of days for retaining each type of message:

174


For Audit Event messages set Retain audit events for __ days.

l

For Messages and Approval messages set Retain message events for ___ days

.

5. Click OK to save the change.

175

Chapter 12: Managing uploads to

Nuance

You can help Nuance improve the future quality of speech recognition by sending speech data from your network to Nuance on a regular basis. This chapter explains how to upload data to Nuance.

You can help Nuance improve the future quality of speech recognition by sending speech data from your network to Nuance on a regular basis. No personal information is ever sent to Nuance and participation in data collection is completely voluntary.

The process of accruing the speech data that Nuance can use is called data collection. When you turn on data collection, you let the Dragon clients collect up to 500 MB of text and data per user about optimizations performed and send it to the Nuance Management Server to be stored.

The Nuance Management Server then uploads the data every night at 2:00 AM. Only Nuance can change this schedule.

Turning on data collection for your site

To turn on data collection for your entire site, take these steps:

1. On the menu bar, click Organizations > Search.


3. To see your organization's information and add details to it, click the Organization > Details icon in the ribbon.

4. Select the Products tab.

5. Expand the Dragon Naturally Speaking section.

6. Select the Upload user data to Nuance for research purposes option.

7. Click Save to save the change.

176


Turning on data collection for individual

or users

You can also turn on data collection for individual end users in the User Account Details tab under the Network Edition US sub-tab:

1. On the menu bar, click the User Accounts ribbon, then click the Search icon in the ribbon under User Accounts.

2. When the name of the user appears in the User Accounts screen, double click the name to open the User Account Details for that healthcare provider.


4. Expand the User Account Options section.

5. Go to the bottom of the User account options section and click the Upload dictation

data to Nuance for research purposes check box.

6. Click Save to save the change to the user account settings.

7. You can repeat these steps for selected individual user accounts in the NMS Server.

177

Chapter 12: Managing uploads to Nuance

Privacy of your data and Nuance data collection

When you implement Data Collection it is for sending recognition data to Nuance to improve the accuracy of this and future products. Nuance works with collected data because our software can learn from experience about the language you, and your fellow professionals, use. We track the vocabulary, syntax, and pronunciation used by professionals in practice, and our experience makes our products more accurate and easier to use for you and others.

Nuance will never pass your recognition data on to anyone else or use it for any other purpose other than as set out in this notice.

Nuance will only collect recognition data (on behalf of your organization), and will collate and combine it with recognition data collected from other health professionals using Data

Collection. We will not store the recognition data under your name, the company name, or an individual’s name, although the database will contain a search function enabling such terms to be searchable within the database.

Nuance will use the recognition data in accordance with your organization’s instructions. We use it to conduct research in order to enhance and improve the accuracy of this and future products.

The only people with access to this data will be our employees, permitted agents, subcontractors, etc. on a need to know basis, all of whom are bound by obligations of confidentiality to keep the data strictly confidential.

Nuance will transfer the personal data to its Data Collection sites that may be located outside of the EEA. However, Nuance shall ensure that any such transfer is compliant with the EU Data Protection Directive.

Our corporate policies and practices, and our contractual commitments to your organization, require us to take appropriate technical and organizational measures against unauthorized or unlawful processing of any personal data that you have provided to us and against accidental loss or destruction of, or damage to, that personal data.

178

Chapter 13: Working with Text and

Graphics/auto-texts and custom words

This chapter describes how administrators and create and manage Text and

Graphics/auto-texts and custom words in the Nuance Management Console.

Overview of managing Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words

The management behavior for Text and Graphics/ auto-texts and custom words are virtually identical.

Note: Text and Graphics and Text and Graphics DragonTemplates are supported. Text and

Graphics with Lists are supported if they are in Command Sets.

n

Centralized management for ALL users across all client applications. If you create a Text and graphics/auto-text or a custom word in the NMS, it is immediately available to all users regardless of the client application they use.

n

Increased standardization of documentation. By centrally defining profile customizations, administrators can ensure that all users are documenting in a standardized manner.

n

Increased control and granularity: l

Common customizations (Text and graphics/auto-text, custom words, speech settings) can be defined at the Site level to enforce standardization.

l

Customizations can be added at the group level to support practice or location specific customizations.

l

Personal customizations can be created at the user level.

n

Common Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words that are shared by multiple users should be exported from DNS Professional and imported into the NMS at the Site or Group level. n

Any new shared Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words should be created in the

Nuance Management Console at the Site or Group level.

180


An administrator can define and manage Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words at the Site, Group, or personal (user) level using the Nuance Management

Console. This impacts the Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words that are available to other .

n

A userdefines and manages “personal” Text and Graphics/ auto-texts and custom words using the client application (Dragon or a SpeechAnywhere Services powered third party application). This does not impact the Text and Graphics/ auto-texts and custom words that are available to other .

n

An administrator can view all shared and personal Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words that are associated with a provider.

n

Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words that are available to a userdepend on that provider’s Site and Group membership. For example, a userthat belongs to

Group-1 in Site-1 can “see” all Text and Graphics/auto-texts defined at the Site level for

Site-1, all Text and Graphics/auto-texts at the Group level for Group-1 and any Text and Graphics/auto-texts defined at the personal level.

n

When a userlogs into the client application (Dragon or a SpeechAnywhere Services powered third party application), the application queries the NMS for a list of all shared

Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words that the usercan access (based on the

Site and Group membership) and adds these customizations to the provider’s local profile. The client application uploads personal Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words to the NMS. The usercan access and use all shared Text and

Graphics/auto-texts and custom words based on their group memberships and permissions. The usercan use all of their personal Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words.

n

Any commands that are marked as protected are not uploaded to the NMS from the

Dragon client. If you wish to share protected commands with end-users in a site or group, you should place the commands in a Command Set.

n

Text and Graphics/ auto-texts and custom words with the same name can be defined at the Site, Group, or Personal (user) levels. The only requirement is that the names of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words must be unique within the level it is defined in.

n

If “duplicate” names exist in the list of Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words that a usercan use, the NMS will return the most specific objects. For example, the

NMS returns personal Text and Graphics/auto-texts before group Text and

Graphics/auto-texts.

Overview of Text and Graphics/auto-texts

This section provides general information about Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

The Text and Graphics/auto-texts feature enables you to define standard blocks of text (in

Rich Text Format (RTF)) that your users can insert into their document with a short voice command. Text and Graphics/auto-texts often consists of one or more paragraphs, also called 'normals' or 'canned text'. Using Text and Graphics/auto-texts reduces the time the user needs to dictate and improves the consistency of documentation.

If the application that your users are using supports the Text and Graphics/auto-texts filtering feature, you can also specify that certain Text and Graphics/auto-texts should only be active for certain documents or forms.

181

Chapter 13: Working with Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words

Important: When defining Text and Graphics/auto-texts, it is strongly recommended that you give it a distinctive name that cannot be misinterpreted as speech to be recognized. This helps to ensure that the Text and Graphics/auto-texts is correctly inserted.

Text and Graphics/auto-texts enable a user to say a command that inserts text (in Rich Text

Format (RTF)) into a form with multiple fields, a document in a text editor such as Microsoft

Word, or a single line text field. The text can be plain text or formatted text. A sequence of keystrokes is a custom command rather than Text and Graphics/auto-texts. For this discussion, we refer to the inserted text or data as 'auto-text content'.

In the Nuance Management Console, an administrator creates Text and Graphics/autotexts and associates each Text and Graphics/auto-texts with 'auto-text content'. Afterwards, a user can say the name of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts to insert the associated 'autotext content' at the cursor position. For example, an administrator creates Text and

Graphics/auto-texts called “normal chest” and associates it with the text "PA and lateral views of the chest revealed a normal-sized heart." When a user says “insert”, the associated text is inserted at the cursor location.

When an administrator creates Text and Graphics/auto-texts, they should choose a name for the Text and Graphics/auto-texts that is easy to remember; and pronounce, and that reflects the 'auto-text content' that is associated with the Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

For more information about how to use Text and Graphics/auto-texts, see your product's s user documentation.

Administrators associate Text and Graphics/auto-texts with sites, groups and users. If Text and Graphics/auto-texts with the same name exist on more than one level (site, group, or user) in an organization, the lower level settings override the higher level settings. For example, Text and Graphics/auto-texts settings at the user level override Text and

Graphics/auto-texts settings at the group level.

Dragon Text and Graphics/auto-texts

Dragon stores Text and Graphics/auto-texts locally and synchronizes them with the NMS.

Text and Graphics/auto-texts greater than 4 MB in size do not synchronize with the NMS.

Only global Text and Graphics/auto-texts are synchronized; Text and Graphics/auto-texts for Application or Window are not synchronized

Dragon considers Text and Graphics/auto-texts as Global if they were created in the

Nuance Management Console or another client application.

Valid characters and size limitations for Text and Graphics/auto-texts names and spoken forms

Valid characters for Text and Graphics/auto-texts names

The following are valid characters you can enter in the fields for Text and Graphics/autotexts:

Name: n all alpha characters.

n all numbers n apostrophes n periods

182

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide n hyphens n opening and closing angle braces n blank characters n spaces

Description: all characters and blanks

Spoken Phrase: all spaces, periods, apostrophes, hyphens, numbers and letters.

Display String: all characters and blanks

Content: all characters and blanks

Valid characters for Text and Graphics/auto-texts spoken forms

All characters and numbers, including blank characters, except for EMEA using the Speech

Magic engine with SpeechAnywhere Services.

n spaces n periods n apostrophes n hyphens n numbers n letters n

Underscores

Size limitations for Text and Graphics/auto-texts names

The following are the maximum lengths of fields for Text and Graphics/auto-texts and do not apply to other types of commands.

n

Name: The maximum is 80 characters.

n

Description: The maximum is 1024 characters.

n

Spoken Phrase: The maximum is 148 characters plus an additional 50 characters for keywords.

n

Display String: The maximum is 80 characters.

n

Content: Configurable by an NMC super-user only, The maximum is 4 MB. The minimum maximum is 1 MB. If a client application sends the NMS an auto-text with a body that is greater than the configured maximum size, the NMS does not accept the auto-text and marks the auto-text as deleted .

n

Prefix/Postfix Keywords: The maximum is 25 characters.

Synchronizing Auto-texts Between the NMS and the Dragon Client

When the administrator creates new Auto-texts or edits existing ones, end users must log out of the Dragon Clients on their local machines and log back in to their local machines two times. When the Dragon Client restarts after this second log in, it will receive the newest Autotexts from the NMS.

183


Creating shared and personal Text and Graphics/autotexts and custom words

Synchronizing Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words on the Dragon Client

When the administrator exits existing or creates new Text and Graphics/auto-texts or custom words, end users must shut down and restart the Dragon Clients on their local machines. When the Dragon Client restarts, it will receive the newestText and

Graphics/auto-texts and custom words from the NMS.

Administrators create and manage common shared Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words

An administrator uses the Nuance Management Console to create and manage common

Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words at the Group or Site levels. These objects are available to all that are part of these sites and groups. The Administrator changes speech settings that impact speech recognition behavior and formatting. As an administrator adds, or edits Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words, the changes are captured by the NMS.

When a use rlogs into the client application (Dragon or a SpeechAnywhere Services powered third party application), the application queries the NMS for a list of all Text and

Graphics/auto-texts and custom words that the usercan access. The NMS makes all of the common Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words available to the provider. The

NMS applies settings that impact speech recognition and formatting to all recognized text for the provider.

Workflow - Administrator adds individual Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words

1. An administrator adds Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words at the Site /

Group or User level using the Nuance Management Console.

2. A user logs into the client application (Dragon or a SpeechAnywhere Services powered third party application).

3. Custom Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words are available to the userfor dictation.

Workflow - Administrator deletes Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words

Since the same Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words can exist at the Site, Group or Personal level, deleting an instance of Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words does not remove it from all user vocabularies.

Or users create and manage personal Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words

In addition to “shared” customizations such as group level Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words, or users may further customize their speech experience by creating and managing "personal" Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words. The user still has full access to Site and Group level customizations, in addition to their personal customizations.

A user can create personal auto-text and custom words using Dragon or a

SpeechAnywhere Services powered third party application.

If an administrator makes changes to Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words,

Dragon settings, those changes are available to the NMS whenever a user session is

“refreshed”. The NMS automatically refreshes a session after period of provider/user

184

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide inactivity or when a user logs out and back into the client application (Dragon or a

SpeechAnywhere Services powered third party application).

When a Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words, the objects are stored locally and in the NMS. The next time the user logs into the client application (Dragon or a

SpeechAnywhere Services powered third party application), the application queries the hosted NMS for a list of all Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words that the user can access and makes them available to the provider. The personal (user level) Text and

Graphics/auto-texts and custom words are visible to administrators in the Nuance

Management Console.

Workflow - user deletes Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words

Provider’s can maintain their own vocabulary by deleting Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words that are not useful or required for their dictations.

A user can only delete Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words from their personal vocabulary. If Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words are defined at the site or group level, they must be deleted by an administrator.

Defining Text and Graphics/auto-texts

Procedure

For more information on creating Text and Graphics/auto-texts, see Creating an Text and

Graphics/auto-texts

.

Remarks about creating Text and Graphics/auto-texts n

To set the Owner name to the site that users are assigned to, in the left folder panel, select the site.

n

The Name field contains part of the voice command that users must say to insert the

Text and Graphics/auto-texts; make sure it is unambiguous and easy to pronounce.

For example, you enter "normal chest" in the Name field; when a user says "auto-text normal chest" or "insert normal chest" the text 'PA and lateral views of the chest revealed a normalsized heart. The lungs are clear of any active infiltrations.' is inserted into their document (the

Text and Graphics/auto-texts name is not inserted into the document).

Creating Text and Graphics/auto-texts

If you have the “Product – Manage DM360 Network Edition” right but do not have the

“Product – Manage Speech Anywhere” right: n

The Auto-text screen displays only one row DNS Professional Text and

Graphics/auto-texts can only have one spoken form.

n

If you have the “Product – Manage Speech Anywhere” right: n

The Auto-text screen displays the Display String column.

n

The Auto-text screen displays a grid that can contain up to five rows of hold spoken forms for each Text and Graphics/auto-texts and their display strings. 360 Speech

Anywhere Services Text and Graphics/auto-texts can have up to five different spoken forms.

To create Text and Graphics/auto-texts, perform the following steps:

185


1. In the Nuance Management Console, select Speech Recognition.

2. In the Auto-texts section, click Manage.

3. Find and select a site, group, or user.

4. In the Auto-texts section, click Add.

5. In the New Auto-text screen, set the following fields: l

Name: The name of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts. When the user says “insert” followed by the name of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts, the application inserts the Text and Graphics/auto-texts content at the current cursor position. In the Auto-text screen, the Text and Graphics/auto-texts content is the text in the field under the formatting bar. l

Make sure you enter valid characters into this field. l

Description: Information that describes the Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

l

Language: The language associated with the Text and Graphics/auto-texts. Enter an

IETF language tag, for example, "en-US" for U.S English.

6. In the rich text field under the formatting buttons, enter the Text and Graphics/auto-texts content. In NMS 3.0 and higher, you can now add tables, audio files, .xls files, and movie files to Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

7. When you enter text in the Name field, the Nuance Management Console updates the

Spoken Phrase field in the first grid row with the text The Nuance Management Console automatically places the system prefix and postfix (if available) in the leading keyword and trailing keyword columns for the spoken phrase. For DNS Professional only, the

Auto-text screen only displays the single/primary spoken form for the auto-text/Textand-Graphic.

To add a spoken phrase for the Text and Graphics/auto-texts, you must have the Product

– Manage NSA right. Perform the following steps:

i. Click the plus sign on the left side of the grid. The Nuance Management Console adds a new row to the spoken phrase grid and automatically places the system prefix and postfix

(if available) in the Leading Keyword and Trailing Keyword columns for the new spoken phrase.

ii. In the Spoken Phrase column, enter a phrase that the end user says to trigger the Text and Graphics/auto-texts. 360 | SpeechAnywhere Services supports multiple spoken phrases per auto-text. l

Make sure you enter valid characters into this field.

iii. (Optional) In the Display String column, enter text to display. This field can be blank.

4. Click Save. You can also click Save & New to save your changes and create new Text and Graphics/auto-texts. The Save and Save & New buttons are not enabled until at least one spoken phrase is added to the Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

Example Text and Graphics/auto-texts: normal chest

1. On the Nuance Management Console, select Speech Recognition.

2. Under Auto-texts, click Add.

3. In the New Auto-text tab, set the following fields: l

Name: Enter 'normal chest 1234'.

l

The Nuance Management Console auto-fills the Spoken Phrase field in the first row of the spoken phrase grid with 'normal chest'.

l

Description: Enter 'An auto-text for normal chest x-rays'.

186


Language: Enter 'en'.

4. In the rich text field under the formatting buttons, enter "PA and lateral views of the chest revealed a normal-sized heart. The lungs are clear of any active infiltrations".

5. Click Save. You can also click Save & New to save your changes and create new Text and Graphics/auto-texts. The Save and Save & New buttons are not enabled until at least one spoken phrase is added to the Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

Editing Text and Graphics/auto-texts



The Display String column is not visible.

n

The Auto-text screen displays only one row DNS Professional. Text and


n

If you have the “Product – Manage Speech Anywhere” right: n

The Auto-text screen displays the Display String column.

n

The Auto-text screen displays a grid that can contain up to five rows of hold spoken forms for each Text and Graphics/auto-texts and their display strings. 360 Speech

Anywhere Services Text and Graphics/auto-texts can have up to five different spoken forms.

Note: You cannot modify an auto-text that is linked to a Command Set. The Delete, Cut,

Copy, and Export buttons are disabled in the Nuance Management Console.

To edit Text and Graphics/auto-texts, perform the following steps:



3. Find and select a Text and Graphics/auto-text by performing the steps described here .

4. In the Auto-texts section, click Details.

187


5. In the Auto-text tab, modify one or more of the following fields: l

Name: The name of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts. When the user says “insert” followed by the name of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts, the application inserts the Text and Graphics/auto-texts content at the current cursor position. In the Auto-text screen, the Text and Graphics/auto-texts content is the text in the field under the formatting bar.

See Overview of Text and Graphics/auto-texts and your product's administrator doc-

umentation for details about how to define a good Text and Graphics/auto-texts name. l

Make sure you enter valid characters into this field. For details, see Valid characters for Text and Graphics/auto-texts names and spoken forms .

l


6. In the rich text field under the formatting buttons, modify the Text and Graphics/auto-texts content. In NMS 3.0 and higher, you can now add tables, audio files, .xls files, and movie files to Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

7. For DNS Professional only, the Auto-text screen only displays the single/primary spoken form for the auto-text/Text-and-Graphic. To add a spoken phrase for a Text and Graphics/auto-texts, you must have the Product – Manage NSA right. Perform the following steps:

8. i. Click the plus sign on the left side of the grid. The Nuance Management Console adds a new row to the spoken phrase grid and automatically places the system prefix and postfix (if available) in the leading keyword and trailing

keyword columns for the new spoken phrase.

2. ii. In the Spoken Phrase column, enter a phrase that the end user says to trigger the Text and Graphics/auto-texts. 360 |

SpeechAnywhere Services supports multiple spoken phrases per auto-text. l

Make sure you enter valid characters into this

field. For details, see Valid characters for Text

188


iii. (Optional) In the Display String column, enter text to display.

This field can be blank.

iv. Click Save.

and Graphics/auto-texts names and spoken forms

.

9. To modify a spoken phrase for the Text and Graphics/auto-texts, you must have the Manage DM360 Network Edition right. Perform the following steps:

i. Edit the text in the Spoken Phrase column

ii. Edit the text in the Display String column.

iii. Click Save.

9. To delete a spoken phrase, you must have the Product – Manage NSA right. If there is only one Spoken Phrase in the list, you cannot delete it. Perform the following steps:

i. On the same row as the spoken phrase, click the red X .

ii. Click Save.

3. Click Save. You can also click Save & New to save your changes and create a new Text and Graphics/auto-texts. The Save and Save & New buttons are not enabled until at least one spoken phrase is added to the Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

Using Text and Graphics/auto-texts

Scenario n

A doctor is working on a form with the cursor in the Impression field.

n

The doctor says "auto-text normal chest", the text you defined is inserted.

n

The doctor has saved time and the information is written consistently every time.

Procedure

For more information on how to insert Text and Graphics/auto-texts, see your product's end user documentation.

Adding and managing keywords for auto-texts

Overview of keywords for Text and Graphics/auto-texts

A keyword for Text and Graphics/auto-texts consists of a leading keyword and trailing keyword.

The leading keyword is placed before the auto-text/Text-and-Graphic and the trailing keyword is placed after the auto-text/Text-and-Graphic.

For Text and Graphics/auto-texts created using the Nuance Management Console or

SpeechAnywhere Services, the Text and Graphics/auto-texts automatically adds the leading keyword to the spoken form phrase. To use the auto-text/Text-and-graphic, end-users must say the leading keyword followed by the name of the auto-text/Text-and-graphic.

Notes:

The leading keyword and trailing keyword are optional.

189

Chapter 13: Working with Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words n

Auto-texts created using the Dragon client (Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional) do not get a leading keyword. n

If a leading keyword is configured (in the Organization Details – Products tab) for the language that is chosen when creating the Text and Graphics/auto-texts, the Text and Graphics/ auto-texts created using the Nuance Management Console or

SpeechAnywhere Services, get a prefix.

n

The NMS stores keywords as part of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

n

Text and Graphics/auto-texts only includes a keyword if it has been configured to include one.

n

Editing Text and Graphics/auto-texts created using the Nuance Management

Console preserves the existing keywords.

n

DNS Professional ignores keywords. The Dragon client has the ability to alter, edit and remove the keywords for Text and Graphics/auto-texts. When Dragon sends the auto-text to the NMS, the NMS inserts the auto-text as is and does not add a keyword. n

You can create keywords in the Nuance Management Console and they appear as leading and trailing keywords when viewing auto-text in Nuance Management

Console. In Dragon, you also see these same keywords but they just appear as part of the auto-text in Dragon.

n

Updating organization keywords updates all Text and Graphics/auto-texts in the

NMS for the organization.

n

The Text and Graphics/auto-texts automatically places keywords in the leading

keyword and trailing keyword columns. The keyword values are not be editable in these columns.

Create keywords for an organization

Updating a keyword for a language, for an auto-text/Text-and-graphic, updates the keyword for all Text and Graphics/auto-texts in an organization for that language.

1. In the Nuance Management Console, select Speech Recognition > Keywords. The

Nuance Management Console displays the Keywords grid:

190


191

2. On one of the language rows, enter a prefix in the leading keyword column. The maximum number of characters for a prefix is 25. The default value for US English is “insert”.

3. Enter a postfix in the trailing keyword column. The maximum number of characters for a postfix is 25. The default value is “”.

4. Click Save, click OK.

Change keywords for an organization

1. In the Nuance Management Console, select Speech Recognition > Keywords. The

Nuance Management Console displays the Keywords grid:


2. On one of the language rows, edit the value in the leading keyword column. The maximum number of characters for a prefix is 25. The default value for US English is “insert”.

3. Click Save.

4. In the Update Keywords dialog box, type 'CHANGE KEYWORD' and click OK.

5. Edit the value in the trailing keyword column. The maximum number of characters for a postfix is 25.

6. Click Save.

7. In the Update Keywords dialog box, type 'CHANGE KEYWORD' and click OK, click

OK.

192


Delete Text and Graphics or auto-texts

You can delete Text and Graphics/auto-texts at the group, site, or user level.

To delete Text and Graphics/auto-texts

1. Search for the Text and Graphics/auto-texts by performing the steps described in Searching for auto texts.

2. Select one or more Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

3. In the Auto-texts section of the ribbon, click Delete.

4. In the dialog, click Yes.

Cutting, copying, and pasting Text and Graphics/autotexts or words

In Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional, version 13.5, Dragon Medical 360 | Direct 1.4, and 360 | SpeechAnywhere Services, Text and Graphics/auto-texts and words are stored in the Nuance Management Server and can be shared between healthcare products.

An administrator can use the Nuance Management Console to copy or cut and then paste

Text and Graphics/auto-texts and words from one level (user, group, or site) to another level.

Notes:

You cannot cut and paste Text and Graphics/auto-texts and words into a new level if: n

Text and Graphics/auto-texts and words with the same name already exist there.

n

The spoken phrase of the Text and Graphics/auto-text or word are the same as the spoken phrase of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts or word in the paste location.

In the above two cases, the Cut button is grayed out/disabled and the source Text and

Graphics/auto-texts and words are not deleted.

n

If you select Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words, click Cut, and proceed to modify or delete the Text and Graphics/auto-text or words, none of these actions are taken into account by the cut operation. The cut Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words do not reflect any of these operations.

You cannot copy and paste Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words into a new level if: n

Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words with the same name already exist there.

n

The spoken phrase of the Text and Graphics/auto-text or words are the same as the spoken phrase of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words in the paste location.

In the above two cases, the Copy button is grayed out/disabled and the source Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words are not copied.

n

If you select Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words , click Copy, and proceed to modify or delete the Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words, none of these actions are taken into account by the copy operation. The copied Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words do not reflect any of these operations.

193


Cutting or copying and pasting Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words

1. Use the Nuance Management Console to create one or more Text and Graphics/autotexts or words. The Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words are saved to the NMS.

2. Use the Manage Auto-texts screen or Manage Words screen to view and select one or more Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words.

3. In the Auto-texts area or the Words area, click Cut or Copy. You can also right-click the

Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words and select Cut or Copy. The Nuance Management Console stores the list of Text and Graphics/auto-texts and words selected for the cut operations.

4. Use the left navigation panel to select a new location for the Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words.

5. Click Paste or right-click the Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words and select Paste.

6. Click Yes.

7. In the dialog box, click OK.

8. The Nuance Management Console cuts or copies the selected Text and Graphics/autotexts or words from the source level to the target level. If this is a cut operation, the Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words are removed from the source level. If this is a copy operation, the Text and Graphics/auto-texts or words are retained at the source level.

Searching for auto-texts, sites, groups, or users

When you first open the Manage Auto-texts screen, the Organization field displays the name of the currently managed organization. You can change the value in this field.

Changing the value will change the data that the Manage Auto-texts screen displays.

NMS introduces changes to the Manage Auto-texts screen to help you manage and find the auto-texts in an organization.



3. To view all the hierarchy levels that are associated with the auto-texts, click Display all

levels.

4. To view auto-texts that have been disabled, click Show disabled auto-texts.

5. To view details about a specific auto-text, double-click the name of the auto-text in the

Auto-text Name column.

The left side of the Manage Auto-texts screen displays a tree-like structure: n

The first element in the tree is the Auto-texts element. To view all the auto-texts in the organization, click the Auto-texts element.

n

The second element in the tree is the sites element. To view the sites in the current organization, expand the sites level. To view all the auto-texts that are associated with a particular site, click a site.

n

If groups exist in the organization, the third element in the tree is the groups element.

To view the groups in the current organization, expand the groups level. To view all the auto-texts that are associated with a particular group, click a group.

194


If users exist in the organization, the fourth element in the tree is the users element. To view the users in the current organization, expand the users level. To view all the autotexts that are associated with a particular user, click the user.

To view information about auto-texts that are part of a site in the organization, part of a group in the organization, or associated with a particular user, in the tree, select the site, group, or user.

The right side of the Manage Auto-texts screen displays the following information about each auto-text: n

Auto-text Name: The name of the auto-text. n

Spoken Phrase: The spoken phrase for the auto-text. If there is more than one phrase for the auto-text, this column displays “{multiple}”.

n

Language: The language of the auto-text.

n

Owner Type: The hierarchy level associated with the auto-text; one of site, group, or user. n

Owner Name: The name of the site, group, or user that is associated with the autotext.

n

Description: Information that describes the auto-text. n

Application Target: The name of the application associated with the auto-text. For example, "Microsoft Word".

n

Command Set: The name of the Command Set that contains the auto-text.

n

Protected: Whether the auto-text can or cannot be viewed in the Nuance

Management Console.

n

Status: The state of the auto-text.

n

Modified: The last time the auto-text was modified.

Steps for searching for auto-texts, sites, groups, or users

The tree structure on the left side of the Manage Auto-texts screen contains an element called 'Click here to search'. This item is at the same level as the Auto-texts element in the tree. Use the 'Click here to search' item to search for auto-texts, sites, groups, and users in an organization.




4. In the search field, enter search criteria. Search for auto-texts, sites, and groups by their name. Search for users by their login name. Search criteria must be at least 3 characters in length.




iv. To search for an auto-text, enter the name of the auto-text.


6. The Manage Auto-texts screen displays the search results under the 'Click here to search' item as follows, where x is the number of matched items for that object:

195

Chapter 13: Working with Text and Graphics/auto-texts and custom words l

Sites (x) l

Groups (x) l

Users (x) l

Auto-texts (x)

7. To view sites, groups, users, or auto-texts that matched the search criteria, under the

'Click here to search' item, expand the Sites, Groups, Users, or Auto-texts level.

8. To view the auto-texts that are associated with one of these expanded objects (Sites,

Groups, Users Commands), click on the object.

9. To view all the hierarchy levels that are associated with the auto-texts, click Display all

levels.

10. To view auto-texts that have been disabled, click Show disabled auto-texts.

11. To view details about a specific auto-text in the search results, double-click the name of the auto-text in the Auto-text Name column.


Viewing Text and Graphics/auto-texts details



The Display String column is not visible n

The Auto-text screen displays only one row DNS Professional Text and


n n n

If you have the “Product – Manage Speech Anywhere” right:

-The Auto-text screen displays the Display String column

-The Auto-text screen displays a grid that can contain up to five rows of spoken forms for an Text and Graphics/auto-texts and their display strings.

360 Speech Anywhere Services Text and Graphics/auto-texts can have up to five different spoken forms.

To view details about Text and Graphics/auto-texts, you must first search for the Text and

Graphics/auto-texts.

1. Search for Text and Graphics/auto-texts by performing the steps described in Searching for Auto texts .To view details about a specific Text and Graphics/auto-texts, perform one

of the following actions: l

In the search results, double click the name of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts in the

Auto-text Name column.

l

In the search results, select the Text and Graphics/auto-texts. On the ribbon, in the

Auto-text section, click Details.

196


The Auto-text tab displays the following information:

197 n

Name: The name of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

n


n

Language: The language associated with the Text and Graphics/auto-texts. Enter an

IETF language tag, for example, "en-US" for U.S English.

n

leading keyword: A keyword that appears before an auto-text/Text-and-graphic. For

details, see Adding and managing keywords for auto-texts.

n

trailing keyword: A keyword that appears after an auto-text/Text-and-graphic. For

details, see Adding and managing keywords for auto-texts.

n

Spoken Phrase: The value from the Name field. 360 | SpeechAnywhere Services recognizes spoken phrases as the spoken forms of the auto-text. For Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional, the Auto-text screen only displays the single/primary spoken form for the auto-text/Text-and-Graphic.

n

Display String: The text to display.

Note: If you have the “Product – Manage DM360 Network Edition” right but do not have the


The “Display String” column is not visible n

The Auto-text screen displays only one row DNS Professional Text and


You can modify characteristics of the Text and Graphics/auto-texts in the lower part of the

Auto-text screen. See Editing Text and Graphics/auto-texts for details.

Importing or exporting Text and Graphics/auto-text

In the Nuance Management Console, you can import and export Text and Graphics/autotexts using an XML schema based file.

Import Text and Graphics/auto-texts

Note: You can only import an auto-text if it is part of a Command Set.

To import a list of Text and Graphics/ auto-texts from an XML file, perform the following steps:


1. In the Nuance Management Console, select the Speech Recognition tab.

2. In the Auto-texts section, select Import.

3. On the File To Import screen:

i. To import Text and Graphics/auto-texts information exported from the Dragon Client, select Dragon format(XML).

ii. To import Text and Graphics/auto-texts information exported from the Nuance Management Console, select Nuance Management Server format(XML).

iii. Click the magnifying glass and select an XML file that contains the Text and Graphics/auto-texts information.

iv. Click Open.

v. Click Next.

4. On the Auto-Texts to Import screen, select the auto-texts to import.

5. Click Next.

6. If you chose Nuance Management Server format(XML) in step 3, and the XML file contains the object level for each record in the file, on the Level screen:

i. To use the auto-text level information from the XML file, choose the first option.

ii. To manually specify the auto-text level, select the second option and choose one of: Site,

Group, or User.

7. If you chose Nuance Management Server format(XML) in step 3, and the XML file does not contains the object level for each record in the file, on the Level screen, choose one of: Site, Group, or User.

8. Click Next.

9. On the Ready to Import screen, click Next.

10. On the Importing Auto-texts screen, when the progress bar is full, click Next.

11. On the Results screen, verify the information.

12. Click Finish.

Export Text and Graphics/auto-texts

To export a list of Text and Graphics/auto-texts to an XML file, perform the following steps:

1. Search for Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

2. Select one or more Text and Graphics/auto-texts.

3. On the ribbon, in the Auto-texts section, select Export.

4. In the Export Auto-text dialog, to select a location to save the file, click the magnifying glass.

5. Select a location and click OK.

6. Click Export. The Nuance Management Console saves the file with the following filename: exportedAutoTexts_<YYYYMMDD>.xml

7. When the Export Auto-text dialog displays the message "Export successful", click

Close.

198


Chapter 14: Working with

Command Sets

199

This chapter describes how to work with and manage command sets.

Overview of Command Sets

If you are using Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional in any mode other than Standalone

Mode, Data Distribution tool is replaced by command sets. Command sets allow you to create, delete, distribute, and manage custom commands using the NMC.

A command set is a collection of voice commands and lists: n

Voice Commands l

Text and Graphics/auto-texts (from mycmds.dat), DragonTemplates l

Step by Step commands l

Macro Recorder commands l

Advanced Scripting commands l

DVCKeys l

DVCscript n

Lists l

All the above commands that include lists

The NMS stores these objects at the site and group levels.

Text and Graphics/auto-texts commands contained in command sets are not shared between the NMS and the Dragon client.

Objects that are part of a Command Set cannot be modified or deleted individually. However, you can delete a Command Set. This action deletes all the objects that are associated with the Command Set.

Auto-texts and Commands that are tagged as protected in a .DAT/.XML file cannot be exported or be viewed in the Nuance Management Console.

Command sets at the group level override command sets at the site level. For example, say we have Site 1 that contains Group X. Site 1 contains command set 'A'. Group X also contains

Chapter 14: Working with Command Sets a command set called 'A'. When a user that is a member of Group X logs into DNS

Professional, they receive and can use the group level command set 'A'.

The actions an administrator can perform with command sets are similar to the actions available for auto-texts and words.

Advantages of using Command Sets instead of creating Auto-text commands in the NMC

To distribute commands to users, you have two options: n

Place commands into a Command set and apply the set to a site or group n

Create individual commands and apply them to a site, group or user

The first time a user logs into DMNE through the Dragon client, the client interacts with the

NMS to process and share commands or command sets with the user.

If individual commands were created by an administrator in the NMC, and there hundreds of these commands, the user login process may take longer than expected.

To share a set of commands, consider placing commands into Command Sets.

The NMS processes and shares Command sets faster than individual commands. This will speed up the user login time.

Getting the Latest Command Sets from the Nuance Management Server (NMS)

When the administrator adds new commands to an existing command set, or creates new command sets, end users must log out of the Dragon Clients on their local machines and log back in to their local machines two times. When the Dragon Client restarts after this second log in, it will receive the newest commands and command sets from the NMS.

Searching for Command Sets, sites, or groups in the

Nuance Management Console

When you first open the Manage Command Sets screen, the Organization field displays the name of the currently managed organization. You can change the value in this field.

Changing the value will change the data that the Manage Command Sets screen displays.

NMS introduces changes to the Manage Command Sets screen to help you manage and find the command sets in an organization.


2. In the Command Sets section, click Manage.

3. To view all the hierarchy levels that are associated with command sets, click Display all

levels.

4. To view details about a specific command set, double-click the name of the command set in the Command Set Name column.

The left side of the Manage Command Sets screen displays a tree-like structure: n

The first element in the tree is the Command Sets element. To view all the command sets in the organization, click the Command sets element.

n

The second element in the tree is the sites element. To view the sites in the current organization, expand the sites level. To view all the command sets that are associated with a particular site, click a site.

200



To view the groups in the current organization, expand the groups level. To view all the command sets that are associated with a particular group, click a group.

To view information about command sets that are part of a site in the organization or part of a group in the organization, in the tree, select the site or group.

The right side of the Manage Command Sets screen displays the following information about each command set: l

Command Set Name: The name of the Command Set. l

Language: The language associated with the Command Set.

l

Owner Type: The hierarchy level associated with the Command Set; one of site or group. l

Owner Name: The name of the site or group that is associated with the Command Set.

l

Description: Information that describes the Command Set.

l

Modified: The last time the Command Set was modified.

Steps for searching for command sets, sites, or groups

The tree structure on the left side of the Manage Command Sets screen contains an element called 'Click here to search'. This item is at the same level as the Command Sets element in the tree. Use the 'Click here to search' item to search for command sets, sites, or groups in an organization.




4. In the search field, enter search criteria. Search for command sets, sites, and groups by their name. Search criteria must be at least 3 characters in length.

l

To search for a site, enter the name of the site.

l

To search for a group, enter the name of the group.

l

To search for a command set, enter the name of the command set.


6. The Manage Command Sets screen displays the search results under the 'Click here to search' item as follows, where x is the number of matched items for that object: l

Sites (x) l

Groups (x) l

Command Sets (x)

7. To view sites, groups, or command sets that matched the search criteria, under the 'Click here to search' item, expand the Sites, Groups, or Command Sets level.

8. To view the command sets that are associated with one of these expanded objects (Sites,

Groups, Command Sets), click on the object.

9. To view all the hierarchy levels that are associated with command sets, click Display all

levels.

10. To view details about a specific command set in the search results, double-click the name of the command set in the Command Set Name column.

201

Chapter 14: Working with Command Sets


Viewing Command Set details in the Nuance

Management Console

1. Perform the steps described in Searching for Command Sets, sites, or groups

.

Considerations before creating or importing commands or command sets

Recommended naming conventions for a command set

When you create a command set, give the command set a descriptive name that indicates the organization, group, application, or department it is meant for:

OrgID_Department_App_Commands

Where:

--OrgID is the organization ID for the overall organization

--Department is the specific department the Command Set is meant for

--App is the application that the commands apply to.

For example: 123456_Radiology_EMR_Commands

Recommended naming conventions for a list

When you create a new list, give it a name that is specific to its deployment context.

During a DNS Professional dictation session, active command set commands, custom commands, and built-in commands are loaded into memory.

For commands with lists, if two lists have the same name but are from different command sets, then they could potentially conflict. To minimize list name conflicts, it is recommended that lists within each command set have their own prefix or extension.

The complexity of the prefix or extension depends on the context of the intended deployment and parent command set.

Recommended naming conventions for a command

Check for naming conflicts between commands and especially conflicts between lists used by commands, both in the name of the lists and the contents of the lists.

Try to make command names very unique and specific, especially if they are likely to conflict with other commands.

To avoid conflicts between Command Sets and with custom and built-in commands, it is important that the name (and spoken form) of the command be different from other commands that are at the same availability level (global, application-specific, windowspecific).

Try to avoid generic command names, especially for global commands where the chance of unintended conflicts is higher.

202


Cross-Department Commands and Lists

You should add a short organizational ID for all lists within the intended organization, including ‘global’ commands and commands that are for applications and windows that are available for multiple (or all) departments\groups.

For example: mgh_referral_source

In this case, ‘mgh’ is the organization id and ‘referral_source’ is the root name of the list.

Department-specific commands and lists

For command set lists that are unique to specific departments or groups within the organization, you should add an additional ID to minimize conflicts between the groups.

For example: mgh_rad_position

In this case, ‘rad’ is the department and ‘position’ is the root name of the list.

Application-specific commands and lists

For lists that are intended for specific applications, you should add an ID for that application to minimize conflicts between applications.

For example: mgh_rad_ehr_function

In this case ‘ehr’ (i.e. - ‘electronic health record’) could be the prefix for a specific EHR system used at the organization and ‘function’ is a list of specific functions to access in that EHR.

Update existing Command Sets instead of creating new ones

Before you create a new Command Set, consider adding the new commands to an existing

Command Set.

This is especially recommended if: n you need to add new commands for users n the commands are logically related.

n the commands use the same lists.

This can help minimize the occurrence of list conflicts. The lists in different Command Sets should hopefully have different names and contents.

How conflicts between commands are identified and displayed

Conflict Checking in the Dragon client when loading Command Sets

The commands can conflict by having the same name and availability or by using a conflicting list name. The contents of a command (For example, steps or text) do not have to be the same to cause a conflict. Commands that are identical to Command Set commands (name,

203

Chapter 14: Working with Command Sets availability, type, and contents) can be identified using the ‘Purge Identical MyCommands’ tool in the Dragon Client. For details, see the Dragon Help.

When comparing commands from different command sets or with MyCommands, the names of lists used by the command are ignored so that the keywords and ‘signature’ of the command are compared. This avoids conflicts in cases where the only difference is the values within the lists, which could have conflicting values and unintended results when loaded into the vocabulary. This comparison is performed because list-value-level conflicts can be expensive to determine, and this type of conflict detection is currently not supported.

Example 1:

CmdSet1: Do this <list1> then <list2>

CmdSet2: Do this <list3> then <list4>

CmdSet3: Do this then

CmdSet4: Do this

Dragon treats the commands as follows when comparing across Command Sets:

CmdSet1: Do this <> then <>

CmdSet2: Do this <> then <> // Conflicts with CmdSet1 command

CmdSet3: Do this then

CmdSet4: Do this

In this case, the command in CmdSet2 conflicts with the CmdSet1 command because the only difference is the name of the lists.

If the first two commands were defined in the SAME command set then this restriction would be loosened, as the chances for an unintended conflict are lower.

The goal is to avoid unexpected results when commands from different command sets

(including MyCmds) end up resulting in the same spoken form in the vocabulary due to conflicting list values.

To avoid these problems the commands and lists from each command set need to be distinct, as much as possible.

Example 2:

An important exception to the above comparison rules is the case when the commands are list-only, and have no other keywords. For example:

CmdSet1: <list5> <list6>



These commands have no keywords other than the list values themselves. If the list names are eliminated the command signatures would look like this:

CmdSet1: <> <>

CmdSet2: <> <>

204


CmdSet3: <> <>

In this case, all of the two-list-only commands would look exactly the same and there is no other context to differentiate them, other than comparing the list values.

We do not want to consider all commands with this pattern to be in-conflict, so a direct comparison with the list names is performed.

Example 3:

Commands with different list names are not considered to be in conflict as long as the remaining spoken form of the command does not match another command in a previously loaded command set or in MyCommands ( have the same ‘signature’). However, the resulting commands in the vocabulary could conflict at the list-value-level with unpredictable results.

So in the above case, the commands are treated as follows:

CmdSet1: <list5> <list6> // Loaded first. No Conflict.

CmdSet2: <list7> <list8> // Differs from CmdSet1, so no conflict.

CmdSet3: <list5> <list6> // Conflicts with command from CmdSet1

The command in CmdSet3 conflicts with the previously loaded command from CmdSet1, so there is a conflict and the command is treated as Not Active.

Conflict checking sequence for Command Sets

The following is the typical conflict checking sequence performed for Command Set commands:

1. As each Command Set is loaded (in alphabetical order), the commands and lists in the currently loading Command Set are compared against previously loaded commands and lists.

2. Commands with the same name and availability (Global, Application, Window) conflict as will commands that use a list with the same name as a list that is from a different, previously loaded, Command Set.

3. If a conflict is detected, the commands that are in-conflict are marked as ‘not active’ and are not loaded into the vocabulary. The first command loaded with the same name/availability is the ‘active’ one.

4. Once all of the Command Set commands are loaded into the ‘Master Command Set’, the entire collection of commands is then compared to any custom commands that are defined in MyCommands (MyCmds.dat). If there is a conflict, the command in MyCommands is treated as the active command.

Custom commands in MyCommands override any conflicting commands and lists from the command sets.

Conflict Detection during a Session

If changes are made to custom commands (MyCommands) during a user session, the commands in the ‘Master Command Set’ collection are reevaluated to determine if the active state of any of the commands should change.

If a new command conflicts with commands in the Command Sets, then those Command Set commands become inactive.

205


If a command is removed from MyCommands, it is possible for Command Set commands to become active without requiring the end-user to log in again. An exception to this is that deleting a command that uses a list that is conflicting with Command Sets does not immediately remove the list from the vocabulary, even if the deleted command is the last command to use the list. In this case the unused list is removed when MyCommands is reloaded the next time the end-user logs in.

Command Sets ‘New Copy’ and Avoiding Command and List Conflicts

One way to create a custom command is to use ‘New Copy’ on an existing Command Set command from within the Command Set view of the Command Browser (Dragon client). It is important to remember that the custom command that is created may now conflict with an existing command in the Command Sets and cause a previously active Command Set command to become not active.

Make sure to give the new command a name that does not conflict with existing Command

Set commands. If you are copying a command that uses lists you need to rename the lists to something other than a name of an active Command Set list or the copied list will conflict with the Command Set list and cause commands to become inactive.

Viewing information about Command and Command Set conflicts

When loading command sets, commands that are found to be in-conflict are marked as not active and are not be loaded into the vocabulary. You can view information about the conflicts in two places: n

The Command Browser ‘Active’ column n

The Dragon log

The Command Browser ‘Active’ column

In the Command Browser , the Command Sets’ View/Mode has columns that display the

‘Command Set’ for the command that was loaded and an Active column that displays the status of the command (active or not active). In addition to the ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ value, if you hover the mouse cursor over the Active column of a command that displays ‘No’, Dragon displays a tool tip that contains information about the conflict.

n

Command Conflict information displays when there is another command with the same name and availability in a previously loaded Command Set or in MyCommands

(MyCmds.dat).

n

List Conflict information displays when the command uses a list that has the same name as a list in a previously loaded Command Set or in MyCommands

(MyCmds.dat).

One or both conflict types can occur for a command.

Example 1: A command conflicts with one other command

Active: No

Command Conflict: LP Note Commands.dat

List Conflict: <pressure>: LP Note Commands.dat, <volume>: LP Note Commands.dat

206


The first line Active: No’, means that there is a conflict and the command is not active in the current vocabulary.

The second line 'Command Conflict: LP Note Commands.dat’ means that a command with the same name and availability was already defined in a previously loaded command set ‘LP

Note Commands.dat’.

The third line ‘List Conflict: <pressure>: LP Note Commands.dat, <volume>: LP Note

Commands.dat’, means that the command uses a list called ‘pressure’ that was already defined in ‘LP Note Commands.dat’ and also a second list called ‘volume’ that was already defined in ‘LP Note Commands.dat’.

Example 2: A command conflicts with more than one command

In the case of a conflict with more than one Command Set, multiple Command Set conflicts are displayed:

Active: No

Command Conflict: LP Note Commands.dat, MyCmds.dat

List Conflict: <pressure>: LP Note Commands.dat, <volume>: LP Note Commands.dat,

<pressure>: MyCmds.dat, <volume>: MyCmds.dat

The first line ‘Active: No’, means that there is a conflict and the command is not active in the current vocabulary.

The second line ‘Command Conflict: LP Note Commands.dat, MyCmds.dat’, means that a command with the same name and availability was already defined in the previously loaded command set ‘LP Note Commands.dat’, as in the first case, and is also defined in

‘MyCmds.dat’ (MyCommands).

The third line ‘List Conflict: <pressure>: LP Note Commands.dat, <volume>: LP Note

Commands.dat, <pressure>: MyCmds.dat, <volume>: MyCmds.dat’, is similar to the first case in that there are two lists, ‘pressure’ and ‘volume’, that were already defined in ‘LP Note

Commands.dat’, but additionally states that these lists were also defined in ‘MyCmds.dat’

(MyCommands).

The Dragon Log

The Dragon.log file contains information about conflicts encountered during Command Set loading during DNS Professional user login. The Dragon.log file is located in the current

Windows User folder.

For example:

C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Roaming\Nuance\NaturallySpeakingxx\Dragon.log’

Log Entries prefixed with ‘[Command Sets]’ show command set file loading information and

‘<Command Conflict>’ and ‘<List Conflict>’ warnings for conflicts that occurred. This data can be used to troubleshoot conflicts between Command Sets and also with custom commands

(MyCommands).

Creating Command Sets In the Dragon Client

Note: You, the administrator, perform the steps in this topic in the Dragon client. However, if an end-user has useful commands that would be useful to others, you may ask the end-user

207

Chapter 14: Working with Command Sets to export those commands to a .dat file. The end-user’s .dat file can then be imported to your profile and combined with other commands to create the final Command Set file or can be used as a Command Set file itself, if deemed appropriate.

Command Sets are groups of custom commands that you, the administrator, can upload to the Nuance Management Server for distribution to multiple users. You cannot edit existing command sets in the Dragon client, but you can create new ones by exporting commands to a .dat file that you later use to create a new Command Set.

You must also determine: n

The commands that will go into a new Command Set.

n

The name the Command Set.

n

The commands to add to the Command Set.

n

The directory to export those commands to.

A Command Set is created by exporting selected commands from a group of custom commands that are contained in a user profile. This user profile is typically a profile created specifically for administrative reasons to avoid altering a non-administrator's user profile and also to minimize end-user command conflicts once the Command Set is deployed. The commands for a Command Set can be created by importing existing commands, creating new commands in the Command Browser, or by copying a command from an existing

Command Set. See "Creating new commands in the Command Browser" in the Dragon

Help for instructions on how to create custom commands.

To create a Command Set .dat File

1. Open the Command Browser (say "Command Browser" or click Command Browser on the Tools menu of the DragonBar).

2. Select Mode > Manage from the Command Browser menu bar. A list of available commands appears.

3. Create any commands that you need to be in the Command Set that do not already exist in the list of available commands (via import, create, edit, or copy).

4. Select the commands that you want to be in the Command Set.

5. Click the Export button, located in the Task pane. The Export Commands dialog box appears.

6. Use the Export Commands dialog to browse to the directory that you will export the commands to.

7. Enter the name of the Command Set in the Name field.

8. Click Save to save the Command Set.

Note: If a Command Set contains commands with the same names and availability as commands that an end user created or copied on his local machine, or if the Command Set contains commands that have lists in them, and those lists have the same name as lists contained in custom commands that an end user created on his local machine, this will cause a conflict.

In this case, the version of the command that the end user created takes precedence over the version in the Command Set, and the Command Set version will be inactive. For more details, see "Organizing Command Sets by Availability" in "Viewing Command Sets in the

Dragon Client" in the Dragon Help.

208


Adding Command Sets in the Nuance Management

Console

When you import a Command Set, the commands contained within the Command Set (autotext, step by step, advanced scripting) are linked to that Command Set.

When you import a Command Set at a particular level, the Nuance Management Server

(NMS) stores the objects that are associated with the set at that same level. For example, if you import a Command Set at the Site level, the NMS stores the objects in that Command Set at the Site level.

When you import a Command Set, if a command name contains angle brackets (e.g. “insert normal <whatever>”), the NMS identifies the command as containing an associated list.

A Command Set import job will fail if: n

The set contains objects with names with unsupported characters.

n

Imported objects have the same name as existing objects at the level you are importing into.

When a Command set is imported, the Nuance Management Console displays a message in the Messages section that indicates if the import was successful or if there was an error.

If importing a Command Set fails, an error message is added to the NMS log

.

Updating a Command Set

You can use the Command Set import process to update a previously imported command set, for example, to update and add commands to a command set after it was deployed.

When you update a Command Set by importing a new Command Set, all the objects that are associated with the Command Set are updated.

Steps for adding Command Sets

When you import an XML command set, square brackets ([]) are accepted and converted to angle brackets (<>).

Note: Before you perform the following steps, it is recommended that you create or use a special user profile explicitly for creating command sets and testing commands. This is to avoid adversely affecting an end-user’s profile. You must log into DNS Professional with this profile and import Command Sets into the profile. If the profile is an end-user’s profile, be sure to remove commands created for the Command Set process and return the profile to its previous state.



3. Find and select a site or group by performing the steps in Searching for Command Sets, sites, or groups

.

4. In the Command Sets section, click Import. If you selected a site, the Nuance Management Console adds the Command Set to that site. If you selected a group, the Nuance

Management Console adds the Command Set to the Group.

209


5. In the Speech Command Set screen, the Name field is automatically filled with the name of the .dat/.xml file. For example, if the imported file is my_command_set.xml, then the Name field will contain my_command_set.xml. Set the following fields:

6. l

Description: Information that describes the Command Set.

l

Path to .DAT/.XML file: The .dat or xml file that contains the Command

Set information.

7. Click Import Dragon Command Set.

8. In the Import Command Set dialog box, click OK.

Modifying Command Sets in the Nuance Management

Console



3. Find and select a site or group by performing the steps in Searching for Command Sets, sites, or groups .

4. Select a Command Set.

5. In the Command Sets section, click Update.

6. In the Update Command Set dialog box, browse to the .dat or .xml file to replace the existing command set.

7. Click Update.

8. In the Update Command Set dialog box, click OK.

Deleting Command Sets in the Nuance Management

Console

You can delete Command Sets at the site or group level.

To delete Command Sets

1. Search for the Command Set by performing the steps in Searching for Command Sets, sites, or groups .

2. Select one or more Command Sets.

3. In the Command Sets section of the ribbon, click Delete.


210

Chapter 15: Working with custom words

This chapter describes how to work with and manage custom words.

Overview of custom words

NMS provides support for custom words for multiple Nuance products, including Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Professional). The client applications for these products obtain custom words from the NMS and add them to an end-user’s vocabulary.

Words are associated with users and are added to all user vocabularies.

Like with auto-texts, custom words must be unique in each level (Site, Group, User) in the NMS.

For example, word X can exist at the Site level and at the Group level, but only one instance of word X can exist at each level.

An administrator can delete words but not necessarily for large quantities.

The Dragon client and words

The Dragon client allows users to create and manage words. Users can create words by specifying the written and spoken forms of a word in the word browser or by importing words.

Users use the vocabulary editor to set word properties or train words. As well, the Words menu on the DragonBar provides many options for working with words.

For details, see the Dragon Help.

Using the Word sharing feature instead of the DDT when upgrading to DNS Professional

In DNS Professional you use the word sharing feature instead of the Data Distribution Tool (DDT) to share custom words across your organization.

If your organization has used the DDT to share custom words, before you upgrade to DNS

Professional, you should import these DDT custom words into the NMS. This can prevent the

NMS from unnecessarily sharing custom words to a user's vocabulary. Sharing a large number of custom words can delay the loading of a user's profile and thus slow down the log in process.

212


It is important that the end-user save the profile after word sharing occurs. This action prevents the word sharing process from repeating unnecessarily in the future and ensures log in delays only occur once per vocabulary for each word added or deleted.

Neglecting to save a profile after the word sharing process will result in the words sharing process having to occur again the next time the vocabulary is loaded.

Searching for custom words, sites, groups, or users

When you first open the Manage Auto-texts screen, the Organization field displays the name of the currently managed organization. You can change the value in this field. Changing the value will change the data that the Manage Auto-texts screen displays.

1. In the Nuance Management Console, select Speech Recognition. The interface for managing Auto-texts appears in the ribbon at the top of the screen.

2. In the ribbon at the top of the screen, click Manage.

3. A tree like structure appears on the left side of your screen. Click on a node in the tree to access the ribbon for that feature. For example, if you want to search for custom words, click the Custom Words node.

4. To view all the hierarchy levels that are associated with words, click Display all levels.

5. To view words that have been disabled, click Display disabled words.

6. To view words that have been deleted, click Display deleted words.

7. To view details about a specific word, double-click the written form of the word in the Writ-

ten form column.

The left side of the Manage Auto-texts screen displays a tree-like structure. It contains the following elements: n

The Auto-texts element. To view all the Auto-texts in the organization, click the Autotexts element.

n

The Commands element. To view all the commands in the organization, click the

Commands element.

n

The Words element. To view all the custom words in the organization, click the Words element.

n

The Command Sets element. Click on this element to view all of the command sets in the organization.

n

The Lists element. Click on this element to view all of the lists in the organization.

Beneath these top-level elements, there are additional items in the tree: n

If groups exist in the organization, there is a Groups element in the tree. To view the groups in the current organization, expand the groups level. n

If users exist in the organization,the tree includes a Users element. To view the users in the current organization, expand the users level.

To view information about words that are part of a site in the organization, part of a group in the organization, or associated with a particular user, in the tree, select the site, group, or user.

213


The right side of the Manage Words screen displays the following information about each word: l

Written Form: The text description for the word. l

Spoken Form: The phrase that a user speaks to apply the word. l

Language: The language that is associated with the word.

l

Level: One of site, group, or user.

l

Status: The state of the word.

l

Modified: The last time the word was modified.

l

Batch: Indicates if the word was processed by a batch process or interactively.

Steps for searching for words, sites, groups, or users

The tree structure on the left side of the Manage Words screen contains an element called

'Click here to search'. This item is at the same level as the Words element in the tree. Use the 'Click here to search' item to search for words, sites, groups, and users in an organization.


2. In the Words section, click Manage.


4. In the search field, enter search criteria. Search for words by their written form. Search for sites and groups by their name. Search for users by their login name. Search criteria must be at least 3 characters in length.




iv. To search for a word, enter the written form of the word.


6. The Manage Words screen displays the search results under the 'Click here to search' item as follows, where x is the number of matched items for that object: l

Sites (x) l

Groups (x) l

Users (x) l

Words (x)

7. To view sites, groups, users, or words that matched the search criteria, under the 'Click here to search' item, expand the Sites, Groups, Users, or Words level.

8. To view the words that are associated with one of these expanded objects (Sites,

Groups, Users Commands), click on the object.

9. To view all the hierarchy levels that are associated with words, click Display all levels.

10. To view words that have been disabled, click Display disabled words.

11. To view words that have been deleted, click Display deleted words.

12. To view details about a specific word in the search results, double-click the written form of the word in the Written form column.

214



Re-synchronize words between a User Profile and the

Nuance Management Server

When the administrator adds new custom words to share across the organization, end users must log out of the Dragon Clients on their local machines and log back in twice. When the

Dragon Client restarts after this second log in, it will receive the newest shared words from the NMS.

Creating custom words

Both the written form and the spoken form of a word: n are case sensitive n can only contain one consecutive space


2. In the ribbon at the top of the screen, click Manage.

3. Find and select a site, group, or user by performing the steps here

.

4. In the Words section, click Add. If you selected a site, the Nuance Management Console adds the word to that site. If you selected a group, the Nuance Management Console adds the word to the Group.

5. In the Word screen, set the following fields:

6. l

Written Form: The text version of the word. l

Spoken Form: The phrase that a user speaks to apply the word.

l

Language: The language associated with the word. Enter an IETF language tag, for example, "en-US" for U.S English.

7. To save the new word, click Save or Save & New.

8.

Delete or enable custom words


2. In the Words section, click Manage.

3. Find and select a site, group, or user by performing the steps in Searching for speech words.

.

4. In the search results area, select a word.

5. Perform one of the following actions:

i. To delete the word, in the Word section, click Delete.

ii. To enable the word, in the Word section, right-click the word and select Enable Word.


Importing or exporting custom words

In the Nuance Management Console, you can import and export words using a TXT file with:

215


For individual words: each word on a separate line.

For phrases: multiple words on each line. For example, “Pittsburgh Press”.

For spoken forms: the word followed by a backslash and the spoken form. For example,

“John Doe/jdoe”

Import words

To import a list of words from a text file, perform the following steps:

1. In the Nuance Management Console, select the Speech Recognition tab.

2. In the Words section, select Import.

3. On the File To Import screen, click the magnifying glass.

4. Select a text file to import.

5. Click Open.

6. Click Next.

7. On the Words to Import screen, select the word(s) to import.

8. Click Next.

9. On the Level screen, choose a level for the imported words: Site, Group, or User.

10. In the drop-down list beside the level you selected, choose a specific site, group, or user to associate with the imported words.

11. Click Next.

12. On the Language screen, in the Language drop-down list, select a language for the imported words.

13. Click Next.

14. On the Ready to Import screen, click Next. The Nuance Management Console imports the words. The words are tagged as batch words. The progress bar on the Performing

Import screen displays the status of the import action.

15. When the screen displays 'Speech words import successfully completed'. click Next to view the import results.

16. After you view the import results, click Finish.

Export words

To export a list of words to a text file, perform the following steps:

1. Find and select one or more words by performing the steps in Searching for speech words

.

2. On the ribbon, in the Words section, select Export.

3. In the Export Words dialog, select a location to save the file.

4. Click Export. The Nuance Management Console saves the file with the following filename: exportedWords_<YYYYMMDD>.txt.

5. When the Export Words dialog displays "Export successful", click Close.

216


Chapter 16: Working with Lists

217

This chapter describes how to work with and manage Lists.

Overview of Lists

Lists are text noted by open/close angle bracket, (“< >”) in the Dragon client. When a command set is imported from Dragon, any command that had an embedded list in the

MyCommand Name field, is tagged in the List section under Speech Recognition in the

Nuance Management Console. You can view the list contents in this section in the Nuance

Management Console.

You must have the “Manage Speech Command Set” and “Manage Speech List” rights to perform actions with Lists in the Nuance Management Console.

The “Manage Speech Command Set” and “Manage Speech List” rights are given to all

Nuance Management Server administrator groups that have a Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional.

Searching for Lists, sites, or groups


When you upgrade the Nuance Management Server to NMS 4.1 and higher, the “Manage

Speech Command Set” and “Manage Speech List” rights are given to all Nuance

Management Server administrator groups that have a Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional.

When you first open the Manage Lists screen, the Organization field displays the name of the currently managed organization. You can change the value in this field. Changing the value will change the data that the Manage Lists screen displays.

The Manage Lists screen helps you manage and find the Lists in an organization.


2. In the Lists section, click Manage.

3. To view all the hierarchy levels that are associated with Lists, click Display all levels.

4. To view details about a specific List, double-click the list in the List Name column.

The left side of the Manage Lists screen displays a tree-like structure:

Chapter 16: Working with Lists n

The first element in the tree is the Lists element. To view all the Lists in the organization, click the Lists element.

n

The second element in the tree is the sites element. To view the sites in the current organization, expand the sites level. To view all the Lists that are associated with a particular site, click a site.

n


To view the groups in the current organization, expand the groups level. To view all the lists that are associated with a particular group, click a group.

To view information about lists that are part of a site in the organization or part of a group in the organization, in the tree, select the site or group.

The right side of the Manage Lists screen displays the following information about each list: l

List Name: The text description for the List. l

Language: The language that is associated with the List.

l

Owner Type: One of site or group.

l

Owner Name: The name of the site or group.

l

Command Set: The name of the Command Set that contains the List.

l

Modified: The last time the List was modified.

l

Contents: The objects (auto-texts, commands, etc.) that are part of the List.

Steps for searching for Lists, sites or groups

The tree structure on the left side of the Manage Lists screen contains an element called

'Click here to search'. This item is at the same level as the Lists element in the tree. Use the

'Click here to search' item to search for Lists, sites or groups in an organization.


2. In the Lists section, click Manage.


4. In the search field, enter search criteria. Search for Lists, sites, and groups by their name.

Search criteria must be at least 3 characters in length.



iii. To search for a List, enter the name of the List.


6. The Manage Lists screen displays the search results under the 'Click here to search' item as follows, where x is the number of matched items for that object: l

Sites (x) l

Groups (x) l

Lists (x)

7. To view sites, groups, or Lists that matched the search criteria, under the 'Click here to search' item, expand the Sites, Groups, or Lists level.

8. To view the Lists that are associated with one of these expanded objects (Sites, Groups), click on the object.

9. To view all the hierarchy levels that are associated with Lists, click Display all levels.

218


10. To view details about a specific List in the search results, double-click the name of the List in the List Name column.


Viewing list details


When you upgrade the Nuance Management Server to NMS 4.1 and higher, the “Manage

Speech Command Set” and “Manage Speech List” rights are given to all Nuance

Management Server administrator groups that have a Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional.

1. Perform the steps described in Searching for Lists, sites, or groups

.

2. To view details about a specific List, in the search results, double click the name of the List in the List Name column.

3. The Nuance Management Console displays the Manage Lists screen. The screen displays the following information about the Lists: l

List Name: The text description for the List. l

Language: The language that is associated with the List.

l

Owner Type: One of site or group.

l

Owner Name: The name of the site or group.

l

Command Set: The name of the Command Set that contains the List.

l

Modified: The last time the List was modified.

l

Contents: The objects (auto-texts, commands, etc.) that are part of the List.

219

Chapter 17: Maintaining a Dragon installation

This section contains information on the tools and procedures you can use to maintain Dragon installations, including User Profiles and vocabularies.

Note that you perform the procedures described in this chapter on the Dragon

Client, not via the Nuance Management Console.

Maintaining Installations

There are several actions you can take to maintain your Dragon NaturallySpeaking installation: n

Run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer and schedules the Optimizer to run

automatically (see Using Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer and Scheduler Tools

).

The Dragon service monitors the acoustic optimizer and the language model optimizer schedules and runs the optimizers according to their schedules.

n

Export User Profiles from one computer and import them to another as outlined in Exporting and Importing User Profiles .

n

Work with the Dragon.log file to determine the cause of error messages (see Handling

Dragon Error Messages

).

n

Work with a Usability log file—create a usability log (DgnUsability.log) by pressing the Advanced button on the Data tab of the Options dialog box. For more information, see

Working with the Usability Log .

n

Work with the Dragon knowledge base as outlined under Accessing Dragon Knowledge

Database .

n

Work with the hardware compatibility list (see Hardware Compatibility List ) n

Manage who has administrative privileges (see Managing Who Has Administrative

Privileges ).

Using Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer and

Scheduler Tools

You run Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer Scheduler to:

220


Choose to optimize the acoustic files for the User Profile n

Choose to optimize the language model for the User Profile n

Schedule one or both types of optimization to occur on a particular day or time at particular intervals n

Enable or disable the scheduled optimizations n

Separate procedures exist for running the optimization on a Non-Roaming User Profile

(see Running Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on Non-Roaming User

Profiles

) or a Roaming User Profile (see Running Acoustic and Language Model

Optimizer on Roaming User Profiles on page 223).

Checking the optimization status of a User Profile

Dragon NaturallySpeaking checks the optimization status of a User Profile when: n

Dragon creates a User Profile and loads the profile n

Dragon loads a User Profile one week after its creation and the "Learn from" wizards have not run for the profile n

Dragon loads a User Profile and the "Learn from" wizards have not run for six months n

The Language Model Optimizer has not run in over two months n

The Acoustic Optimizer has never run and at least 1 hour worth of DRA data is available

See the Dragon Help for details.

Keeping custom words up-to-date

Using Dragon’s support for custom words, especially contact names, can make communicating with Dragon faster and more precise. To facilitate this, when Dragon loads a

User Profile, Dragon examines how long it has been since the last time custom words were updated. If required, Dragon displays the Personalize Your Vocabulary dialog box to step the end-user through the custom word update process.

The Personalize Your Vocabulary dialog box contains information about the last time the

"Learn from specific document” wizard and the “Learn from sent e-mails” wizard ran for the profile. The dialog also displays the total time required to run the wizards.

Users can run both the "Learn from specific document” wizard and the “Learn from sent emails” wizard from the dialog.

Dragon displays the Personalize Your Vocabulary dialog box: n

Two days after creating a User Profile if the "Learn from" wizards have not run for the profile n

Once a week after not running a "Learn from" wizard for 1 month or if the end-user pressed cancel the first time Dragon displays the Personalize Your Vocabulary dialog box:

Checking for User Profile maintenance when saving a User Profile

When an end-user saves a User Profile or closes Dragon, Dragon checks to make sure that scheduled language model User Profile maintenance has been performed recently. If not, then an additional check box will appear on the Save dialog. The maintenance should only

221

Chapter 17: Maintaining a Dragon installation take an extra minute or two complete and is always beneficial – especially when new custom words have been added.

Running Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on Non-Roaming User Profiles

An open local end-user cannot run the optimizer tools on User Profiles. Only an administrator can run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer or the associated

Scheduler tools. You must have Windows Administrator privileges (at the operating system level) on the computer where you are running the Scheduler. If you want to optimize a

Roaming User Profile on the computer where you are running the Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer, disable roaming and browse to the Master Roaming User Profile location as if it were local.

As system administrator, you are responsible for running the Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer on the network location of the Master Roaming User Profiles. You can install Dragon on the computer where the Master Roaming User Profiles are located or on any computer that has network access to the Master Roaming User Profiles, then run the

Scheduler. Later, any optimizations that result from running these tools are copied to the

Local Roaming User Profile when Dragon synchronizes it with the Master Roaming User

Profile.

You can run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer from the Windows Start menu without opening a User Profile, or you can run it from the DragonBar using the Tools menu when a User Profile is open as indicated here.

Select Start > All Programs > Dragon NaturallySpeaking > Dragon

NaturallySpeaking Tools > Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer Scheduler.

Running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on a multi-core computer

To increase the accuracy of the User Profile, select Audio > Launch Accuracy Tuning from the DragonBar.

To make sure that corrections and accuracy improvements that end-users make are applied to their non-Roaming User Profile, an end-user should run the Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer on non-Roaming User Profiles only on a multi-core computer.

To run the acoustic and language model optimizers on non-Roaming User Profiles:

1. On the DragonBar, select Profile > Open User Profile.

2. In the Open User Profile dialog box, select a User Profile to run the optimization on and click Open.

3. On the DragonBar, select Help > Improve my accuracy. The Accuracy Center opens.

4. Click Launch Accuracy Tuning now. The Acoustic and Language Model Optim-

izer dialog box opens.

5. If the end-user has not dictated and corrected recognized text since the last time the optimizer was run, you receive this message: There is no new data in the acoustic

archive. Acoustic Optimizer does not need to be rerun. Click OK and the Acoustic

and Language Model Optimizer opens with the Perform Acoustic Optimization option grayed out.

222


6. Check the types of optimization you want to perform, Perform Acoustic Optimization

(to optimize the acoustic files of the User Profile), Perform Language Model Optim-

ization (to optimize the language model of the User Profile), or both.

7. Click Go to start the process. The process may take some time to complete. When the process completes, you receive a message notifying you that it has completed.

8. Click Done.

9. When asked if you would like to save your User Profiles click Yes to return to the Accur-

acy Center. Click Exit in the Accuracy Center dialog box.

Running Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on Roaming User Profiles

To run the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer on Roaming User Profiles:

1. Be sure that a copy of Dragon is installed on the computer where you plan to run the

Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer.

2. Select Start > All Programs > Dragon NaturallySpeaking > Dragon Nat-

urallySpeaking Tools > Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer Scheduler. The

Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer Scheduler dialog box opens.

3. To access the master directory of the Roaming User Profiles you want to optimize, in the

Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer Scheduler dialog box, select File > Set

User Directory. The Set a Directory Containing User Files dialog box opens.

4. On the Set a Directory Containing User Files dialog box, either enter the path to the directory or click the Browse button and browse to the location of the Master Roaming

User Profiles, then click OK. If the User Profiles you want to optimize are located in multiple directories, you can later repeat the steps outlined here and change this directory to locate the additional User Profiles.

5. In the tree of User Profiles, select the User Profile you want to optimize. Notice that if you expand that User Profile in the tree, you see one or more dictation sources under the

Acoustic Optimization tasks in the tree. You also see the vocabulary of the User Profile under the Language Model Optimization tasks.

OR

Select File > New Task. The Windows user name and password dialog box opens. To set a schedule for running the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer, either doubleclick on the dictation source or the language model under that User Profile.

6. Before you proceed, enter your Windows user name and password. If you are logged in to a domain, you must insert the domain name in front of your user name; for example, Hos-

pitalDB\RSessions for the HospitalDB domain.

7. Click OK. The Select Frequency dialogbox opens.

8. Under Optimization, select Perform Acoustic Optimization, Perform Language

Model Optimization, or both.

9. Under User Information, you can either select another User Profile from the User Name drop-down list or, to select multiple User Profiles, click the Multiple Users button to open the Select User Profiles dialog box.

a. In the Select User Profiles dialog box, use the Add> and <Remove buttons to put the User Profiles you want to run optimization on in the Selected endusers in this task list to the right. Or you can click Add All>> or <<Remove All to add or remove all User Profiles from the list.

223


b. You can also move a User Profile up and down in the list by selecting a name and clicking the Move Up or Move Down button. When you are satisfied with the list, click OK to proceed.

10. If you selected multiple User Profiles in the previous step, skip this step. Otherwise, in the

Dictation Source text box, select an audio input device from the drop-down list and in the Vocabulary text box, select a vocabulary from the drop-down list.

11. Under Select Frequency and Start Date & Time, select how often and at what time you want the optimization to run, as well as the first date it should run.

12. At the bottom of the dialog, click the Enabled (schedule task runs at specified time) check box to enable the optimization.

13. Click Apply to apply the changes.

14. Click OK to close the Select Frequency dialog box. The Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer Scheduler dialog box displays a list of the events scheduled in the right pane of its dialog box. You can create more than one optimization schedule for a single User Profile. When you do, both optimization events appear in the schedule list.

15. Click Files > Exit to close the acoustic and language model optimizer scheduler

Removing One or More Optimization Schedules

To remove one or more scheduled optimizations from the scheduler:

1. Select the schedule you want to remove. You can select multiple schedules by holding the CTRL key while clicking a schedule.

2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard or select Options > Delete Selected Tasks on the toolbar.

3. Click OK when you are asked to confirm the deletion.

The Dragon log file

Dragon log location

In Dragon 13, the Dragon.log file is located in the following directory:

%programdata%\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\logs\WindowsUserName.

n

WindowsUserName is the name of the user that is sending messages to the log service.

Dragon log filename format

The Dragon log filename format is “Dragon_Date_Time.log”: n

Date: the date when the file was created in YYYYMMDD format.

n

Time: HHMMSS in 24-hour format.

The log file is named “Dragon.log” when the log services is updating the file. When the log file is closed, the log service renames the file using the “Dragon_Date_Time.log” format.

224


For example: “Dragon_20130820_105023.log”: This Dragon log was created on the 20th of

August, 2013, 10:50:23.

The full path to this log file is:

%programdata%\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\logs\Admin\Dragon_

20130820_105023.log”

Dragon log management

The log service manages the Dragon log files; creating new log files and deleting old ones.

The service creates a new log file when the current file exceeds the size limit of 10 MB.

The service stores the last 10 log files.

Manually creating a new Dragon log file

An administrator can start a new Dragon log file when Dragon starts.

In the nssystem.ini file, set the following parameter:

[Settings]

New Log On Startup=1

1. Open text editing software such as Notepad. On Windows 7, or Windows 8, make sure you have administrator rights when you open the text editor (use the “Run as administrator” option to open the text editor).

2. In the text editor, navigate to the folder that contains the nssystem.ini file.

In Windows 7 and Windows 8, by default, the nssystem.ini file is located in:

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5

3. In the text editor, open the nssystem.ini file.

4. In the “[Settings]” section, add the following line of text: New Log On Startup=1.

5. Save and close the nssystem.ini file.

6. To activate the setting, re-open the User Profile.

Handling Dragon Error Messages

When Dragon displays an error message:

1. Read the message carefully. It may give you enough information to determine what to do.

2. If you dictated text into your document, click Close to close the error message box and then save your document.

3. Do not save your User Profiles.

4. Copy the error message log file (Dragon.log) to a safe place. To locate this file, click Start

> Programs > Dragon NaturallySpeaking > Show Dragon Log. In Dragon 13, the

Dragon.log file is located in the following directory:

%programdata%\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\logs\WindowsUserName

WindowsUserName is the name of the user that is sending messages to the log service.

5. Exit Dragon and start it again. In some cases it may be necessary to restart your computer.

225


6. Insert your Dragon DVD into your DVD reader, run the installation program again, and choose the Repair option on the first screen of the Dragon setup program. After setup finishes, reinstall any Dragon patches that were previously installed.

7. If the error message does not provide enough information to determine what to do, search our Web site for information on the error message. You may find a solution that can save you time and trouble: http://www.nuance.com/product-support/default.asp?

lang=us&prod=dn

Working with the Usability Log

In Dragon NaturallySpeaking, you can set up Dragon to create a usability log that logs all menu commands, toolbar buttons, and voice commands that you use during a dictation session.

To set up a usability log:

1. With a User Profile open, on the DragonBar, select Tools > Options.

2. Click the Data tab.

3. Click the Advanced button.

4. When the Advanced dialog box opens, check the Create usability log check box and click OK to return to the Data tab.

5. Click Applyand then click OK to close the Data tab of the Options dialog box.

The log is located here:

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\logs.

See Dragon file structure for information on default locations on Windows 8 and other operating systems.

Accessing the Dragon Knowledge Database

Solutions to known problems with Dragon are provided at the Nuance Knowledge Base, located at http://nuance.custhelp.com/

.

1. In the Search by Product drop-down list, select Dragon NaturallySpeaking.

Managing end-user administrative privileges

Before You Give Windows Administrator Privileges

Before you decide to give a Dragon user Windows Administrator privileges on a laptop computer, note that you are giving that person access to the Administrative Settings dialog box on that computer.

Determining Logged In User Has Admin Privileges

If the logged in end-user has Windows Administrator privileges, the following line appears in the Dragon.log file after he or she logs in: user has administrative access to NatSpeak

226

Chapter 18: Working with Web applications

This section contains information about support for Rich Internet Applications.

Dragon includes browser extensions, also known as add-ons, for most Web-based applications, like Gmail and Hotmail. These extensions give you Full-Text Control in text fields, and enable spoken commands for important tasks.

Note that you perform all of the tasks described in this chapter on the Dragon Client, not via the Nuance Management Console.

About the Dragon Web Extension

Dragon uses the 'Dragon Web Extension' to work with Rich Internet Applications (RIA) with

Internet Explorer 9 and higher. You need to manually install the 'Dragon Web Extension'.

The Dragon Web Extension allows you to use Full Text Control in supported browsers and most

Web applications to help you perform common tasks by voice. For example, you can say "Click

Text Link", "Click Button", or "Click Inbox" to click the elements on the page. If you do not install the

Dragon web extension, you cannot click page elements by voice. In addition, Full Text Control is not available for dictation in the browsers and Web applications. Without the Dragon web extension enabled, you'll need to click Web page elements using your mouse and keyboard, and dictate content using the Dictation Box.

228


Conditions for loading the Internet Explorer compatibility module and the Dragon Web Extension (Rich Internet

Application)

Conditions for loading the Internet Explorer compatibility module n

The “Enable HTML Support” option is enabled in Dragon.

n

The web browser uses embedded mshtml.

n

The web browser is Internet Explorer 8 or lower.

n

The web browser does use Internet Explorer 8 compatibility mode.

Conditions for loading the Dragon Web Extension (Rich Internet Application) n

Internet Explorer (IE) is version 9 or higher. Rich Internet Application does not start if a web page opens in IE 8 or lower compatibility mode.

n

The “Enable HTML Support” option is enabled in Dragon.

Conditions for using Dragon Web Extension (Rich Internet Application) commands n

The "Enable Commands in HTML Windows" is enabled.

Web browser requirements for the Dragon Web Extension (Rich Internet Application)

The Dragon Web Extension is available in the following Web browsers and versions:

n

Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 9, 10, and 11, both 32-bit and 64-bit n

Mozilla Firefox version 24 and later n

Google Chrome version 16 and later

Important: The makers of Firefox and Chrome frequently release new versions of their browser. For the latest details on Dragon functionality with a particular application, please see the Technical Support page for Dragon on the Nuance web site.

If you don't have one of these browsers in the version listed, you cannot click page elements by voice. In addition, Full Text Control is not available in the browsers and Web applications.

You'll need to click page elements manually (or using MouseGrid and mouse commands) and, if you want Full Text Control, you'll need to use the Dictation Box.

Feature support

The feature is not supported in the following modes: n

Internet Explorer's Metro mode n

Chrome's Incognito mode n

Chrome's Metro mode n

Firefox's Metro mode

229


Installing and enabling the Dragon Web Extension

To enable The Dragon Web Extension

, do the following.

If you need to re-install, see

here

.

Internet Explorer 9 and later

1. Open Internet Explorer. A prompt appears the first time you open the browser after

Dragon installation.

Note: If you click No Thanks at the initial prompt and then later decide to install the extension, you must close and reopen both Internet Explorer and Dragon for the prompt to reappear. If you select Do not ask me again and then later decide to install the exten-

sion, see Do you need to reinstall?

below.

2. Click Proceed. Installation instructions appear.

230


3. Follow the instructions provided.

Mozilla Firefox 24 or later

1. Open Firefox. When a valid user profile is loaded, a prompt appears the first time you open the browser after Dragon installation.

231

Note: If you click No Thanks at the initial prompt and then later decide to install the extension, you must close and reopen both Firefox and Dragon for the prompt to reappear. If

you select Do not ask me again and then later decide to install the extension, see Do you need to reinstall?

below.

2. Click Proceed. Installation instructions appear.


232


3. Click the Install web extension button, and then follow the instructions on the screen to install the web extension.

4. Click the Verify plugin settings button, and then follow the instructions on the screen to verify the plugin settings.

When you've installed the extension and plugin, ensure that the Update Add-ons

Automatically option is selected to receive updates from Nuance. To select it:

1. Click the Firefox button appears.

, and then select Add-ons. The Add-ons Manager

2. Click the cog icon already selected.

, and then select Update Add-ons Automatically if it is not

Google Chrome 16 or later

1. Open Chrome. When a valid user profile is loaded, a prompt appears the first time you open the browser after you install Dragon.

233

Note: If you click No Thanks at the initial prompt and then later decide to enable RIA support, you must close and reopen both Chrome and Dragon for the prompt to reappear. In addition, if you select Do not ask me again and then later decide to install the extension,

see Do you need to reinstall?

below.

2. Click Proceed. The Chrome Web Store opens.


3. Click . A confirmation appears.

234


4. Click Add. Chrome downloads and installs the extension.

Do you need to re-install?

To use all of Dragon's functionality in your browser, you must enable Dragon's web extension. If you did not enable the extension, open the browser you want to install to use the following links while in that browser:

Internet Explorer: https://dnsriacontent.nuance.com/13/addons.html?lang=ENX&browser=ie

Chrome: https://dnsriacontent.nuance.com/13/addons.html?lang=ENX&browser=chrome

Firefox: https://dnsriacontent.nuance.com/13/addons.html?lang=ENX&browser=firefox

235


How to tell if the Dragon Web Extension is Enabled

To determine if the Dragon Web Extension

is enabled:

Internet Explorer

1. Open Internet Explorer.

2. Click the cog icon , and then select Manage add-ons. The Manage Add-ons dialog box opens.

3. Look for the Dragon Web Extension and plugin and ensure the status is Enabled.

If the status is Disabled, do the following to enable it: n

Select the extension. n

Click Enable at the bottom of the Manage Add-ons dialog box. n

Restart the browser.

Mozilla Firefox

1. Open Mozilla Firefox.

2. Click the Firefox button

The Add-ons Manager appears.

or the Menu icon , and then select Add-ons.

3. Click Plugins and look for the Dragon NaturallySpeaking Plugin.

4. Click Extensions and look for the Dragon Web Extension.

In older versions of Firefox, the Enable option appears rather than Always Activate. Click the Enable button to enable it.

Google Chrome

1. Open Google Chrome.

2. Click the menu icon , and then select Settings. The Settings page opens.

3. Click Extensions. Chrome extensions appear.

236


4. Look for the Dragon Web Extension and ensure it is enabled.

If it is disabled, select the Enabled check box to enable it.

Resolving problems

If this is the first time you've tried using a supported web application with Dragon, try restarting your browser and reconnecting to the web application.

If you are using a Web application and browser that support the Dragon web extension

, but the feature is not active, see "If you have problems using Web application support" in the

Dragon Help.

If you can't use the Dragon web application, such as if you are using a Web application or browser that is not supported, you cannot click page elements by voice. In addition, Full Text

Control is not available for dictation in the browsers and Web applications. Without the

Dragon web extension installed and enabled, you'll need to click Web page elements using your mouse and keyboard, and dictate content using the Dictation Box.

237

Chapter 19: Managing Features on the Dragon Client

This section provides information on features that you manage through the Dragon

Client rather than the Nuance Management Server. The Dragon Support Packager

Turning off Dragon's use of Microsoft Active Accessibility Service

Dragon NaturallySpeaking uses Microsoft Active Accessibility Service to let you control certain menus and dialog boxes by voice. Without Microsoft Active Accessibility Service, you would be unable to use Dragon to select menu commands and dialog box controls with your voice.

If you don't need to control the menus and dialog boxes by voice, you can speed up Dragon performance by turning off Microsoft Active Accessibility Services.

To turn off Active Accessibility Services in Dragon for all applications

1. Open the Options dialog box by selecting Tools > Options on the DragonBar.

2. Click the Miscellaneous tab.

3. Clear the Voice enable menus, buttons, and other controls, excluding box if it is selected.

4. Click OK. You will need to exit and re-start Dragon for this change to take effect.

Use a command line to turn off Active Accessibility in Dragon for specific applications

1. Exit Dragon.

2. Open nssystem.ini in a text editor. By default, nssystem.ini is located in:

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5

See Dragon file structure for information on Dragon paths in other Windows operating systems.

3. Under [MSAA Modules Disabled], add a line similar to the following for each application where you want to disable the use of Active Accessibility Services:

<executable_name>=1

238


4. Save and close nssystem.ini.

5. Re-start Dragon.

For example, to disable Dragon use of Active Accessibility Services in Microsoft Word and

Microsoft Excel, you would add the following lines to nssystem.ini:

[MSAA Modules Disabled] winword=1 excel=1

Note: If you do not know the name of an application's executable file, you can start the application from the Windows Start menu and then use the Windows Task Manager to view the list of current Windows applications. The executable names are listed under Image Name on the Processes tab. You can also right-click the application's icon and select the shortcut tab—the Target field will provide the name of the executable.

Use a GUI to turn off Active Accessibility in Dragon for specific applications

1. On the Dragon Bar, select Tools > Options.

2. Select the Miscellaneous Tab.

3. Check the Voice-enable menus, buttons, and other controls, excluding option.

4. Below the Voice-enable menus, buttons, and other controls, excluding option, open the drop-down list. The list contains installed and running applications, and also the following static applications:

- Microsoft Outlook

- Lotus Notes

- Internet Explorer

- Microsoft Word

- Microsoft Excel

- WordPerfect

5. To turn off Active Accessibility for an application, place a check mark beside the application.

6. Click OK.

239

Chapter 20: Commands that perform actions based on the application state

This section contains information how to create and use structured commands that perform actions based on the state of the application.

The structured commands samples that this chapter references are found with the

Dragon Client

About Structured Commands

Dragon includes an extension to text and graphics commands that lets you set the values of variables in text blocks based on voice input.

You can create simple text and graphics commands with variables in the My Commands Editor dialog box without having to do extensive programming in Microsoft ® VBA.

Application states

Structured commands let you control the action of a command based on the existence of a state in the application. For example, when you assign a state to each field in a form, the same command can perform different actions depending on which field is activated.

You can use Advanced Scripting methods to control the states within structured commands or to set the initial state from a non-structured command. You can also create structured commands that prompt the user to select values from a predefined list.

When the user speaks a command, the user is presented with a list of pre-defined values for the command. Once the user selects a value, the value is inserted into the correct location in the macro.

Samples

Dragon includes several sample text and graphics commands with variables and sample structured commands. You can import the samples into Dragon to use them as templates for your own commands. The sample commands are fully commented.

240


For more information, see:

Structured Commands Samples

Importing Sample Commands

Methods

For more information on the methods used by the sample commands, refer to the following: n

Global Methods

SetState

GetState n

EngineControl Methods

MyCommandsActiveState

PromptValue

Structured Commands Samples

Dragon includes several sample text and graphics commands with variables and sample structured commands. You can import the samples into Dragon to use them as templates for your own commands. The sample commands are fully commented.

Sample location

The sample commands are installed in: n

Windows 7, Windows 8:

\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\custom\<language>\samplecommands

A shortcut to this directory is available on the Windows Start menu. To open this directory, click Start > All Programs > Dragon NaturallySpeaking > MyCommands Samples. In

Windows 8 My Commands Samples can be opened from the Apps screen.

Importing Sample Commands

You can import the samples into Dragon to use them as templates for your own commands.

For information, see Importing Sample Commands

Samples

The following samples are included with Dragon:

GroceryListSample_DragonPad

GroceryListSample_DragonPad.xml contains Advanced Scripting commands that simulate an on-line grocery order form in DragonPad. It demonstrates how to set and change command states, activating and deactivating various state structured commands, and how to use the command prompt. The voice command "Prepare Grocery List" causes the first section of a grocery list to display in DragonPad and sets a command state. Each section of the grocery list is designed to have a separate state. The voice command

241

Chapter 20: Commands that perform actions based on the application state

"What's Available" will prompt the user with a set of grocery list commands that are active in the given section.

GroceryListSample_WordPad

GroceryListSample_WordPad.xml contains Advanced Scripting commands similar to those of GroceryListSample_DragonPad.xml. It demonstrates how to set and change command states and to use the command prompt in WordPad and uses a different coding style. The same voice command "Prepare Grocery List" will start the grocery list in WordPad, activate the initial grocery list state, and prompt the user with a set of grocery list commands that are active in the given state. To read more about this sample and its commands, refer to the code comments in the XML file.

SampleBoilerPlate_ColonCancer

SampleBoilerPlate_ColonCancer.xml contains Advanced Scripting commands that demonstrate how to use structured commands and the command prompt for boilerplate text. This sample is modeled after a colon cancer checklist and is designed to work in

Microsoft Word. The voice command "Colon Cancer Checklist" causes the boilerplate text to display and takes the user, field by field, through the checklist.

SampleBoilerPlate_EndoBiopsy

SampleBoilerPlate_EndoBiopsy.xml contains a single Advanced Scripting macro that demonstrates how to set up boilerplate text and use the command prompt to guide users in filling the boilerplate text without using states. This sample is modeled after an endoscopic biopsy report and is designed to work in Microsoft Word 2003 or 2007. The voice command "Prepare Endoscopic Biopsy Gross Template" causes the boilerplate text to display and takes the user, field by field, through the report.

SampleTGV_Restaurant

SampleTGV_Restaurant.xml contains Text and Graphics and Advanced Scripting commands that are used in DragonPad to simulate an ordering system for a Chinese and Japanese restaurant. This sample demonstrates how to set states for structured commands as well as how the same commands can be used to produce different results in different states. The voice command "Chinese Menu" or "Japanese Menu" starts the ordering system and activates the structured commands created for the given state. The voice command "Exit Ordering System" ends the ordering session.

SetStateSample

SetStateSample.xml contains simple Text and Graphics commands that demonstrate how to use variables and text formats and Advanced Scripting commands to set and unset a command state. This sample is designed to work in DragonPad with the initial command "Sample Set State." When the command executes, a command state is set for DragonPad and a simple exchange of greetings is simulated between the user and the system. The user speaks the greeting, e.g. "Good Morning", and the system responds in bold red text. When the user says "Good-bye", the exchange is terminated and the command state is unset.

SampleInjuryReport

SampleInjuryReport.xml together with SampleInjuryReport.dot demonstrates how structured commands and Microsoft Word templates can be used together to create a voice-enabled form filling environment. The template is a mock injury report with several

242

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide text and checkbox fields can be filled using the commands included in the XML file. You start a form filling session with the voice command "Edit Report" spoken in a new document based on the sample template. Both the template and the commands are designed to work in Microsoft Word 2010 or 2013.

Importing Structured Commands

You can import existing structured commands, such as the Structured Commands Samples

, into Dragon to use as templates for your own commands. Use the following procedure to import the sample structured commands that are supplied with Dragon:

To import the sample structured commands:

1. On the New DragonBar or Classic DragonBarTools menu, click Command Browser to open the Command Browser window.

2. Click the Manage button on the Command Browser toolbar.

3. In the Manage area, click the Import button, and in the Import Commands window choose

MyCommands XML files from the Files of type list.

4. Use the Import Commands window to browse to the directory. You'll find it in the following location: n

Windows 7, Windows 8:

\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\custom\<language>\samplecommands

5. Select one of the sample .XML files (for example, sampletgv_restaurant.xml) and click

Open.

6. Click Yes on the Import Commands validation dialog box and then click Import on the

Import Commands window to import the commands contained in the file.

Note: The syntax of XML command files is defined by a document type definition (DTD) file that resides on the Nuance Web site. When you import an XML command file, the application gives you the option of validating the syntax of the XML file against the DTD. The validation step is useful if you receive a XML command file from another person and want to check it for syntax errors prior to importing it.

7. Click OK on the success message and return to the Manage area of the Command

Browser.

To examine the sample code

1. Open the Command Browser and click the Manage button.

2. Expand and select the appropriate item (for example, “<restaurant_type> Menu”)

3. Click the To Script button and then click the Edit button.

The My Commands Editor dialog box opens with the command you selected entered into it.

You can examine and modify the command with the My Commands Editor.

243

Chapter 21: Troubleshooting issues

This chapter provides information on how to troubleshoot issues. Most of the steps described here use the Nuance Management Console, except for the Dragon

Support Packager, which is accessible through the Dragon Client.

View log files for a variety of products and product components

View client logs for a variety of products

You use the Client Logs screen to view log files for a variety of products and items.

The screen allows you to search for log files using a user login, within a date range, and one or all products.

You must first upload the log before you can access it in the Nuance Management Console.

Upload a Dragon client log

View a client log

Perform these steps to view a client log, including a Dragon client log.

1. Click Utilities.

2. In the View area, click Client Logs.

3. On the Client Logs screen, fill in the following fields:

i. To search by user login name, enter a value in the User Login field.

ii. In the From and To fields, enter the date range for the search.

iii. In the Product field, select one of the following options: l

All l

Nuance Management Console l

Dragon Professional


244


5. In the search results, select a log.

6. To view the log, press Ctrl+O or right-click the log and select View.

7. To download the log:

i. Double-click the log or right-click the log and select Download.

ii. In the Download Client Log dialog box, in the Download to field, select a location for the log file and press OK.

iii. Click Start.

iv. When you see 'Download Complete', close the dialog box.

View server logs for a variety of products

Prior to NMS 3.0, administrators needed to VPN into the Nuance data center to find server log files. They may also have had to check multiple node machines for log files.

In NMS 3.0 and higher, the NMS stores log files; allowing administrators to easily find and download them.

To save all current server logs in the NMS, click Store current logs now.

1. Log into the Nuance Management Console.

2. Click Utilities.

3. In the View area, click Server Logs.

4. In the Product field, select a product:

7. In the Start date/time field, select the start date and time for the query.

8. In the End date/time field, select the end date and time for the query.


Viewing Dragon logs

To troubleshoot issues, you can view logs Dragon clients in Dragon NaturallySpeaking

Professional generate.

Dragon logs

Dragon creates a log when you run acoustic optimization.

These job log files have file names are based on the Job Id (which is now an integer), the profile name, the job type, and the type of log file (Dragon log file).

The names of Job log files use the following form: jobId_profileName_JobTypeId.logFileType

If multiple log files exist for the same jobId, the names of the log files are named jobId(n)_... where ‘n’ increments sequentially from 1.

Example: jobId(1)_User1_JobTypeId.logFileType

jobId(2)_User1_JobTypeId.logFileType

.

.

245


.

jobId(10)_User1_JobTypeId.logFileType

You can view the Dragon log files in the Nuance Management Console .



A status bar at the bottom right of the screen displays: n The number of rows on the screen, for example: .

n

An icon that refreshes the search results .

n The save icon.

i. Press the icon.



Viewing Dragon logs

To view the Dragon log files, refer to Viewing Dragon log files on page 246 .

If you call Technical Support, you might be asked to provide one or more of these logs to help Nuance engineers work on any issues with your network.

Nuance Management Console logs

The Nuance Management Console stores user session data in a Nuance Management

Console log file. The log file includes data that could be useful for troubleshooting Nuance

Management Console exceptions or issues.

If an administrator performs an action that causes a Nuance Management Console error or crash, the next time the Nuance Management Console starts, it sends the Nuance

Management Console Log file to the NMC server. Technical support can then analyze the log file. An administrator can also manually upload the Nuance Management Console log file to the NMS.

A Nuance Management Console log file is kept until it becomes larger than 10 MB in size. At that time, the Nuance Management Console discards the log file and creates a new one.

The Nuance Management Console also creates a new log file after it uploads the current one to the NMS.

Upload the Nuance Management Console log file to the NMS

1. In the Nuance Management Console, click the Nuance icon (top left of the screen).

2. Select Upload NMC Log File.

Viewing Dragon log files

To help you diagnose specific problems, the Dragon Medical client creates a file named

Dragon.log for each end user. You can view this file in the Nuance Management Console.

246


In this file Dragon records all of its actions during each dictation session that the user dictated.

If you contact Nuance Technical Support, you may be asked to supply this file.

Note: To have the Dragon Client place the log files in a location where they are accessible for viewing on the Nuance Management Console, you must enable the option Copy Dragon

Professional log to network located under ( Site > Dragon Professional > roaming

user profile). For details, see Setting site roaming user profile General settings .

To view Dragon log files

1. On the User Accounts screen, search for the user whose log files you want to view.

See Viewing, modifying, and deleting user accounts .

2. Select the user in the list and click the Client Logs icon on the ribbon.

3. The Client Logs tab opens and displays a list of log files.

4. Double click on the log file you want to view.

The log file opens and displays user activity information.

Viewing client device usage information

You can create a report and view session usage data per client computer. When a Dragon sessions starts on a client computer, the NMS captures the computers name and starts capturing session information. You use the Nuance Management Console to view information about the computer-specific session.

You can view session usage information per computer for the following license types: n

NMC Administrator n

Author

To generate and view the usage report, you must have the proper administrative rights in the

Nuance Management Server (NMS).

1. Open the Nuance Management Console.

247


2. In the Trends section, under Usage, select Device Use.

The Nuance Management Console displays the Device Use view.

3. Select the search criteria for the report:

i. The Organization field is greyed out.

ii. In the License type field, select a license type.

iii. In the Start Date/Time field, select a start date and time.

iv. In the End Date/Time field, select an end date and time.


The Nuance Management Console generates a report using data from the Nuance

Management Server.

The Nuance Management Console displays the report as a grid with the following information: n

Device Name - The name of the computer or device.

n

Last Login - The date and time when a user last logged into the system from the computer or device.

248


Days Since Last Login - The number of days since the last date a user logged into the system from the computer or device.

n

Total Login Count -The total number of times a user logged into the system from the computer or device between the Start Date/time to the End date/time.

Viewing Speech Recognition Metrics for DM360 Network

Edition

The Dragon client sends usage metrics to the Nuance Management Server (NMS).

In the Nuance Management Console, you can design and run queries about speech metrics for DNS Professional users.

You can export the Dragon usage metrics to a comma delimited files.

Creating a speech recognition metrics query

To perform the following steps, you must have the Manage DM360 Network Edition right.

1. Log into the Nuance Management Console.

2. In the Trends area, under Speech Trends, select Dragon Speech Usage.

3. On the Dragon Speech Usage screen, enter search criteria: l

Last name: Search for speech recognition metrics that are associated with a user with a specific last name.

l

First name: Search for speech recognition metrics that are associated with a user with a specific first name.

l

Group by (first): Specify the first sort level for the query results - one of: l

Site l

Group l

User l

Group by (second): Specify a second sort level for the query results - one of: l

None l

Site l

Group l

User l

Start Date/Time: Search for speech recognition metrics create on or after a specific date and time.

l

End Date/Time: Search for speech recognition metrics create on or before a specific date and time.

l

Site: The site associated with the speech metric.

l

Group: The group associated with the speech metric.

l

Product: The product associated with the speech metric. The items you can select depend on your product management privileges. For example: l

<All Products>: (Only displayed if you have both the Manage DM360

Network Edition privilege and the Manage Dragon Professional privilege)

249

Chapter 21: Troubleshooting issues l

DM360 Network Edition: (Only displayed if you have the Manage

DM360 Network Edition privilege) l

Dragon NaturallySpeaking: (Only displayed if you have the Manage Dragon Professional privilege) l

To display search results in a grid:

i. Select Display results in a grid format by.

ii. Select one of the following options: l

Hour l

Day l

Week l

Month l

To display search results in a graph:

i. Select Display results in a graph format by.

ii. Select one of the following options: l

Word l

Minutes l

Characters

4. Click Search. The Dragon Speech Usage screen displays the results of the query.

The columns that the search results display depend on the information you enter in the search criteria.

For example, the Dragon Speech Usage screen can display the following columns: n

Site - The site associated with the dictation.

n

Organization - The organization associated with the dictation.

n

Day- The day the dictation occurred.

n

Length (minutes) - The total number of minutes of dictation for the user (to two decimal places).

n

Total Words - The total number of words in the dictation.

n

Total Characters - The total number of characters in the dictation.

n

Custom Commands - The number of custom commands in the dictation. Custom commands are found in MyCmds or Command Sets, and include sample and template commands.

n

VDCT Commands - The number of VDCT commands in the dictation. VDCT

Commands include most text/dictation manipulation commands that select, format, and correct text.

VDCT Commands include two subcategories of commands: n

Static commands: Commands that are often followed by the keyword

‘that’. For example, ‘select that’ n

SelectXYZ commands: Commands that precede the word they manipulate. For example, ‘bold Tuesday’.

n

NLP Commands - The number of NLP commands in the dictation. NLP Commands are non-dictation commands that include: n

Dragon commands n

Windows commands

250


Third-party application (tracking) commands n

UI and document navigation commands.

NLP Commands also include text manipulation commands that are not

VDCT Commands.

n

Intuitive Commands - The number of intuitive commands in the dictation. Intuitive

Commands are commands with user-provided context: n

‘Search the Web’ type commands n

Desktop commands n

Email commands n

Social Media commands, such as those for Facebook and Twitter n

VDCT Select Commands - The number of VDCT Select commands in the dictation.

VDCT Select commands are SelectXYZ commands: Commands that precede the word they manipulate. For example, ‘bold Tuesday’.

n

User Count - The total number of active users during the search criteria time period.

Contacting Technical Support

When you purchase Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional, you can also purchase a

Dragon Premium Support maintenance contract. This maintenance contract gives you access to the Technical Support center, which provides our customers with coverage 24hours a day , seven days a week. We provide direct remote support, product operational assistance and corrective action. The Technical Support Center is the place for customers to call with technical questions — either in response to a problem, or simply when assistance is needed. This organization can offer assistance via a remote on-line connection to your systems, and is available toll-free at 800 833-7776. Or save the call and access our Technical

Support Center through iSupport, our premium support website at https://isupport.nuance.com

.

When you call our support line or access iSupport via the Web, you will need to provide the unique customer ID number that Nuance supplied to you.

If you are calling in relation to an issue, you may want to gather some information first, so that

Technical Support can assist you more efficiently. Print this page and collect the following information. If you can't find the information, Technical Support can help you locate it.

251


Technical Support Issue Logging Templates

If your issue is Nuance Management Console-related you will need this information

Your NMS Server license information

(located on Licenses > View Licenses > Licenses Summary tab)

What you were doing when the problem happened

(For example: Configuring group settings, checking Audit

Events)

The text of any error message

Operating system

Processor type and speed

Amount of memory (RAM)

Amount of free hard-disk space

Operating system of the computer where the Nuance Management Console is running

Internet browser being used to view the client, for example,

Internet Explorer version 7 or 8 or FireFox version 3.6).

Add information here

If your issue is related to DNS Professional you will also need this information:

What you (or the Dragon user) were doing when the problem happened (checking your microphone, training the program, and so on)

The text of any error message

Add information here

Operating system

Processor type and speed

Amount of memory (RAM)

Amount of free hard-disk space

Sound card name and model

Microphone name and model

Program log file (Dragon.log).

To find the Dragon.log, see Viewing Dragon log files on page 246 .

Attach the log file if you send e-mail to technical support.

Additional support on the Web n

For developer support, go to http://support.nuance.com/

252

Appendix: Configuring administrative features in Stand

Alone mode

This section contains information how to use the Administrative options, in the

Administrative Settings dialog box, to set and control many administrative features if you are running in Stand Alone mode.

If you are using the Nuance Management Server to administer your installations, not all of the interfaces described here will be accessible, as their functions are being managed via the NMS.

Summaries of Administrative Settings Dialog Boxes

The tabs in the Administrative Settings dialog box are: n

Roaming n

Miscellaneous n

Scheduled Tasks

For more on each tab, see the corresponding topic below: n

Administrative Settings: Roaming tab

n

Administrative Settings: Miscellaneous tab

n

Administrative Settings: Scheduled Tasks tab

Client Administrative Settings: Roaming tab

You use the Roaming tab of the Administrative Settings dialog box to set up the Roaming feature. You must set up the Roaming feature on each computer where you want end-users to dictate with a Roaming User Profile.

When Roaming is enabled in Administrative Settings by default the Open User Profiles dialog box displays large numbers of User Profiles quickly. They can also be organized into subfolders. See

"Creating subfolders for Roaming User Profiles" in the Dragon Help for more information.

254


Enable

Select Enable to activate the Roaming feature and the Roaming User Profile options.

Network Directories

To set the location of the master Roaming User Profile(s):

1. Click the Add button. You use the Roaming User Network Location dialog box to define the network location of the master Roaming User Profiles. The location you pick must be accessible to all computers on the network that you want available for dictation with Dragon.

2. Set the Display Name and the Address under Network Location. The Roaming feature supports the following types of locations: n

Mapped Drive—the format is: <drive letter>:\<folder name>. For example,

y:\roaming. n

UNC Path—the format is: \\servername\sharename\path\filename.

n

HTTP (http:)—the format is: http://myserver.com/<name_of_ virtualdirectory> where <name_of_virtualdirectory> is the name of the virtual directory set up by an administrator during setup of the IIS or

Apache web site. For HTTP locations, click the HTTP Settings button to set information specific to your HTTP connection. You can also test your connection to the HTTP server from the HTTP Settings dialog box.

n

HTTP with SSL (https:)—the format is: https://myserver.com/<name_of_ virtualdirectory> where <name_of_virtualdirectory> is the name of the virtual directory set up by an administrator during setup of the IIS or

Apache web site. For HTTP with SSL locations, click the SSL Settings button to set information specific to your HTTP with SSL connection. You can also test your connection to the HTTP with SSL server from the SSL


Local directory (for cache)


User Profile to the local computer. The local copy is called the Local Roaming User Profile.

You can change the setting of this location, always called <Roaming Local>.

The default location of <Roaming Local> is:

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\RoamingUsers\<display name>\<username>


The <display name> is a name you assigned as a Master Roaming User Profiles location.

You can have multiple network storage locations for your Master Roaming User Profiles.

The <username> is the name of an individual Master Roaming User Profile. There is a separate directory for each User Profile.

Click the Browse button to find or create a new location.

255

Appendix: Configuring administrative features in Stand Alone mode

Check Boxes for Roaming User options

The check boxes and other components below the Local directory are the Roaming User

options. You can also configure the Open User Profiles dialog box to display the Classic

Open User Profiles dialog if desired. See Selecting Roaming User Profile options

for details.


Returns the Administrative Settings dialog box to the state it had when you first installed

Dragon. Note that the default is to have the Roaming feature turned off.




“Allow Custom Properties”, and “Allow Property Queries with Infinite Depth” settings to true. For example, in IIS 7: n

For more information, see Configuring Internet Information Services and WebDAV for HTTP Roaming .

n

If you connected to your Roaming User Profile Master Directory over HTTP and you find that not all your User Profiles are listed in the Open User Profile dialog box, or after creating a Roaming User Profile you cannot open it again, or the Open User

Profile dialog box does not display all the vocabularies and acoustic models for your

User Profiles, make sure that you:

256



Client Administrative Settings: Roaming User Network

Location

You use the Roaming User Network Location dialog box to define the network location of the master Roaming User Profiles.

The location you pick must be accessible to all computers where end-users will dictate using a


Display Name

Sets the directory name displayed in the following locations: n

The Roaming tab of the Administrative Settings dialog box n

The Location of user profile drop-down list in the Open User Profile dialog box.

Note: With the Roaming feature enabled, the Open User Profile dialog box displays only User Profiles in the Roaming User Profile locations. To let the end-users open both local (non-roaming) and Roaming User Profiles, select the Allow non-roaming

user profiles to be opened option on the Administrative Settings dialog box.

Clearing this option prevents end-users from dictating with a non-roaming (local) User

Profile by accident. For more information, see Enabling the Roaming feature on each computer where an end-user will dictate .

n

The Location of user profile drop-down list in the Manage User Profiles dialog box.

Network Location—Address

On each computer where you plan to have users dictating as Roaming users, you must tell that installation of Dragon where the Master Roaming User Profiles are located.

The Roaming feature supports the following types of locations:

Mapped Drives and UNC Paths

Mapped drives connect to a shared network folder that has a drive letter assigned to it.

UNC paths connect to a shared network folder using the Universal Naming Convention

(UNC) to locate a User Profile. The UNC is a way to identify a shared file on a computer or network without having to know the storage device it is on. The UNC path format is:

\\servername\sharename\path\filename.

To use a mapped drive or UNC path:

1. Under Network Location, enter the address of the mapped drive or UNC path.

You can click Browse to browse for the location of the mapped drive or UNC path. This displays the Browse for Folder dialog box. You can also create a new directory on the mapped drive or UNC path by clicking the Make New Folder button.

2. Click OK when you are done.

257


Intranet/Internet connections

The Intranet/Internet connection supports both HTTP and HTTP over an encrypted Secure

Sockets Layer (SSL).

To use an Intranet/Internet connection:

1. Under Network Location, enter the URL address of your HTTP or HTTPS server where your master Roaming User Profiles are located.

2. Click n

HTTP Settings...to display the HTTP Settings dialog box, where you can set information specific to your HTTP connection like Authentication,

Firewall, and Proxy Server information. You can also test your connection to the HTTP server from this dialog box. For more information, see HTTP Settings .

n

SSL Settings...to display the SSL Settings dialog box, where you can set information specific to your HTTPS (SSL) connection. You can also test your connection to the HTTPS server from this dialog box. For more information, see SSL Settings.

Note: You cannot create a non-Roaming User Profile on an HTTP or HTTPS connection.

You can create only Roaming User Profiles on an HTTP or HTTPS connection and only when the Roaming feature is enabled.

Administrative Settings: Miscellaneous tab

The Miscellaneous tab of the Administrative settings dialog box contains the following options:

Backup location for User Profiles

Shows the location where Dragon will save backup User Profiles. n

Click the Change button to open a dialog box where you can specify a new location. n

Click the Use Default button if you want Dragon to use each Windows user's My

Documents folder.

You can change the Backup Location for User Profiles to any directory where Windows has both read and write permissions, including portable devices such as CD or DVD burners. If you change the location, backups for all User Profiles will be located in the same directory.

Data Distribution location

Shows the location where the local installation of Dragon stores customized words and commands. n

Click the Change button to open a dialog box where you can specify the location for this directory. n

Click the Use Default button to set the location to this default path:

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\custom

You can change the Data Distribution location to any directory where Windows has both read and write permissions, including portable devices such as CD or DVD burners.

For a default installation, custom words and commands are located in:

258


Windows 7, Windows 8, and Windows Server 2008:

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13.5\custom\<language>

Check for product updates at startup

Automatically looks on the Nuance Web every time you start Dragon. Any change to this option does not take effect until you restart Dragon.

Do not allow restricted users to add or modify commands

Select this check box to prevent restricted Windows users from adding or modifying Dragon commands. Selecting this option allows only end-users logged on with administrator privileges to add or modify commands.

Disable use of Macro Recorder Commands

Select this box to prevent end-users from using macro recorder commands. End-users can still run the commands.

Disable use of Step-by-Step Commands

Select this box to prevent User Profiles from using step-by-step commands. End-users can still run the commands.

Disable use of Advanced Scripting Commands

Select this box to prevent User Profiles from using advanced scripting commands. End-users can still run the commands.

Do not allow restricted users to modify Vocabularies

Select this box to prevent restricted Windows users from modifying Dragon Vocabularies.

Selecting this option allows only end-users logged on with administrator privileges to modify

Vocabularies.

Record wave data between utterances

Select this option to capture all dictation, preserving all audio including any pauses, filler speech like "ums" and "ahs", extraneous noises, and anything else the speaker may do like cough or laugh.

Correction Only Mode (no dictation available)

Select this option to enable Correction Only Mode.

Correction Only Mode allows transcriptionists to play back a speaker's dictation without having their User Profile loaded. Note that dictation is disabled if you select this option.

Note: You must disable Correction Only mode before running the Acoustic and Language

Model Optimizer.

Disable automatic acoustic model selection in the Acoustic Optimizer

Running the Acoustic Optimizer updates your User Profiles with accumulated acoustic data from any corrections and additional training end-users may have done. Running

Acoustic Optimization increases your overall accuracy. In the process of increasing your accuracy, Acoustic Optimization may select a different acoustic model for your User Profile.

For example, if you chose a General accent during User Profile setup, Dragon may change it if your speech more closely matches another accent. For more information, see "About speech and acoustic models" in the Dragon Help.

259


Select this option to disable the Acoustic Optimizer from selecting a different acoustic model when run.

If you are using .Dragon NaturallySpeaking, see Using multiple acoustic models with a User

Profile

for information on acoustic model selection and User Profiles that use two acoustic models.


Returns the current tab to the state it had when you first installed Dragon. The button does not affect to other tabs, including the Roaming tab.

Notes n

When the User Profile is closed, you cannot use Dragon to dictate or to perform actions by voice. n

You must have administrator privileges to change the Backup Location. Dragon will not let restricted end-users create backup files in directories reserved for the operating system (for example, the \Windows directory). When specifying a backup location, make sure that directory can be accessed by all end-users n

In some versions of Windows, you must be logged on as the administrator before you can access this dialog box.

n

In some situations, an end-user that does not have administrator privileges may have access to options on this dialog that they would not normally have.

n

Dragon NaturallySpeaking allows you to use the Universal Naming Convention

(UNC) to locate a User Profile. The UNC is a way to identify a shared file on a computer or network without having to know the storage device it is on. The format is:

\\servername\sharename\path\filename.

Administrative Settings: Scheduled Tasks tab

The Scheduled Tasks tab of the Administrative settings dialog box allows you to schedule Accuracy Tuning and Data Collection for all User Profiles created with this installation of Dragon NaturallySpeaking. Data collection is available in non-US English versions of Dragon NaturallySpeaking.

Accuracy Tuning

Schedule Accuracy Tuning to help Dragon to learn from you and make your dictation more accurate. Accuracy Tuning runs the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer to update your

User Profile with n frequently dictated word sequences n acoustic data from any corrections you make, including with the keyboard n trained words n commands used n any additional training you perform

Enable scheduled Accuracy Tuning

Check to turn on periodic scheduled acoustic model tuning for all end-users.

260


Clear this checkbox if you want to disable Accuracy Tuning for the User Profile. The setting is enabled by default.

Configure

Click Configure to open the Select Frequency, Data Collection tab and set the Data

Collection schedule. You are immediately asked to log in with your Windows Administrator password to make a schedule change. After you log in, you can set one schedule for

Acoustic model tuning and another for Language Model tuning by clicking the appropriate tab and choosing Daily, Weekly, or Monthly and the start date and time.

Data Collection

Data collection is available in non-US English versions of Dragon NaturallySpeaking.

Enable Scheduled Data Collection—Check to allow Nuance to collect up to 500 MB of acoustic data and text from your dictation sessions. Once the data is collected, you have the option of sending it to Nuance to help improve the accuracy of future versions of Dragon

Professional. No personal information is ever sent to Nuance and participation is voluntary.

n

Click Configureto set the schedule for data collection. You are immediately asked to log in with your Windows Administrator password to make a schedule change. After you log in, you can choose Daily, Weekly, or

Monthly and the start date and time.

Let the user choose when to run Accuracy Tuning and Data Collection—Check to give end-users access to this tab, effectively allowing them to change the schedules for

Accuracy Tuning and Data Collection.


Click this button to restore the default values for Data Collection and Periodic

Optimization.

Notes: n

When the User Profile is closed, you cannot use Dragon to dictate or to perform actions by voice. n

Scheduled Accuracy Tuning and Data Collection cannot run if Dragon is open, including if Dragon is running in QuickStart mode, if Dragon is left open with no User

Profile loaded, or if Dragon is left open by another end-user in a separate Windows session on the same computer. n

Since Dragon uses a local system account to schedule periodic tasks, User Profiles placed on network shares will not be available for scheduled Accuracy Tuning and

Data Collection unless special arrangements are made with the network administrator

For more information, see the following topics in the Dragon Help: n

"About the Acoustic and Language Model Optimizer" for information about Accuracy

Tuning. n

"About Data Collection" for more information about Data Collection. n

The "Options dialog box Data tab" for more information about scheduling Accuracy

Tuning and Data Collection for the current Dragon User Profile.

261

Appendix: Auto-Saving Recognition History Data in Stand Alone Mode

Appendix: Auto-Saving

Recognition History Data in

Stand Alone Mode

262

Appendix: Managing Custom

Words and Commands in Stand

Alone Mode

This section contains information on how you can add or remove the custom words, vocabularies, and commands for a User Profile if you are going to run in stand alone mode instead of with Nuance Management Server as the administrative server.

Adding words, commands, or Vocabularies to User Profiles

If you are running Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional in stand alone mode, you use the

nsadmin

utility to make new words, customized Vocabularies, or new commands available to all

User Profiles on a particular installation of Dragon. Both the nsadmin utility can work across a network.

The nsadmin utility lets you use the command line to make new words, commands, and

Vocabularies available to users. The nsadmin utility can perform only one action at a time.

However, you can create a batch file or script that can perform multiple nsadmin operations on a computer.

Note

If you are using Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional with Nuance Management Server for administration, use the Command Set and Word Sharing features to maintain custom words and commands, not the Data Distribution Tool or nsadmin.

You can use the Voctool to customize a Vocabulary by adding new words or optimizing the language model for a particular User Profile. For more information, see the Voctool Help.

Nsadmin utility for new words, Vocabularies, and commands

Dragon Professional, and Dragon Legal include the nsadmin utility. The nsadmin utility is a command line utility that lets you make new words, customized Vocabularies, and new commands available to all users on a particular installation of Dragon.

264


The nsadmin utility performs only one operation at a time. You can write a batch file or script to execute multiple nsadmin operations on each computer.

For step-by-step instructions on using the nsadmin utility, see the following topics: n

Creating the Data Distribution Directory

n

Starting the nsadmin command line utility

n

Adding custom words from a command line

n

Adding and removing custom Vocabularies from a command line

n

Adding custom commands from a command line

You can use the Data Distribution Tool to run the nsadmin utility from a GUI. For more information, see Starting the Data Distribution Tool.

Creating the Data Distribution Directory

You create a data distribution directory to store word lists, commands, or both, that you plan to distribute to multiple users of Dragon NaturallySpeaking .

When word lists and commands are in the data distribution directory, as soon as a person opens their User Profile, Dragon automatically imports words and commands from the data distribution directory into the User Profile. This occurs regardless of the location of the computer the user dictates on.

You can use the Data Distribution Tool to put words and commands into a data distribution directory. For more information, see Starting the Data Distribution Tool.

Note: The default installation of Dragon places custom words for existing Dragon users in:

Windows 7/Windows 8

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\Custom

Create a data distribution directory in a location other than the default location

Repeat the following steps for each workstation that should share the distributed words or commands.

1. In Dragon, close all open users.

2. On the network, create a directory and give all users that dictate with Dragon access to the directory. Grant read access to that dictate. Grant write access only to administrators.

3. If Dragon is running, on the New DragonBar or Classic DragonBar, select Tools > Admin-

istrative Settings. When the Administrative Settings dialog box opens, proceed to

Step 6.

4. If Dragon is not running, select Start > Run. When the Run dialog box opens, in the Open text box, type the following, making sure to put a space between natspeak.exe and the

/SetDefaultAdministrativeOptions option:

"C:\ProgramFiles(x86)\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13

\Program\natspeak.exe"/setdefaultadministrativeoptions

(The quotation marks are required because Program Files contains a space. Your path might not require quotation marks.)

265

Appendix: Managing Custom Words and Commands in Stand Alone Mode

5. Click OK.

6. When the Administrative Settings dialog box opens, if the user opens automatically, click Cancel to close the user or go to the DragonBar and select Profile > Close User

Profile.

7. Click the Miscellaneous tab.

8. In the Data distribution location text box, click Change... and browse to a location where you want Dragon to store custom words and commands.

9. Click OK.

10. Click Apply to save the changes.

11. Click OK to close the dialog box.

You can now use the Data Distribution Tool or the nsadmin command line utility to put new words and commands into the data distribution directory. For more information, see

Starting the Data Distribution Tool

or Starting the nsadmin command line utility

.

Starting the nsadmin command line utility

You can use the nsadmin utility on a command line to make new words, vocabularies, or commands available to users.

The nsadmin utility performs only one operation at a time. However, you can write a batch file or script to execute multiple nsadmin operations on a computer. You can place the network location of new words or vocabularies in a script and run the script from a client machine to copy the new functionality to the machine.

You can find the nsadmin.exe file in the \Program directory under the parent Dragon installation directory. The default installation directory for Dragon is C:\Program

Files\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\Program .

The nsadmin utilitysupports both mapped drives and UNC paths. For more information,

see Using paths with nsadmin

.

Before you can use the nsadmin utility, you must create a data distribution directory. For

more information, see Creating Data Distribution Directory .

Start the nsadmin utility

1. Select Start > All Programs > Dragon NaturallySpeaking > Tools > NSAdmin

nsadmin starts in a DOS window and lists the nsadmin syntax.

Display help information for the nsadmin utility

1. From a command prompt, type nsadmin/?

Command line syntax for the nsadmin utility

The nsadmin.exe utility uses the following syntax.

nsadmin <operation> <parameters> [options]

266


Commands and parameters

/commands <src_filename>

/words <src_filename>

/vocabulary <src_directory> "<language or dialect> | <model name> |

<category>" <topic ID>

/vocabulary delete <topic ID>

Options

/language enx | fra | deu | ita | jpn | esp | nld

/overwrite yes | no | ask

/validate yes | no | ask

/?

Description

Adds a command file to the local installation of Dragon.

Adds a list of new words to the local installation of Dragon.

Adds a vocabulary from <src_directory> or an exported .top file to the NaturallySpeaking <language> using the specified <model name>, <category> and <topic ID>.

Deletes the base vocabulary specified by <topic ID>.

Specifies an installed language that you want to add words, commands, or a vocabulary to. The default value is "enx".

Specifies overwrite rules if a file exists with the same name as the fie you are adding. The default value is ask.

For adding commands from xml files. The default value is ask.

Displays the command syntax.

267

Adding custom words from a command line

You can use nsadmin to make new words available to all users on a particular installation of

Dragon.

You must first either create a text file or export words from an existing user's installation of

Dragon before you can distribute the words (for example, a list of new drug names) to a different installation of Dragon.

After you use nsadmin to import the custom words, you must close your users, re-open the users, and save them for the changes to become available.

Create a text file that contains custom words

1. Create a text file.

2. At the top of the text file, add @Version=Plato-UTF8.

3. In the text file, add each word or phrase that you want to add to the vocabulary. Make sure each word or phrase uses correct spelling and is on a separate line. Each line can only contain a maximum of 99 characters (written and spoken combined).

4. If you have Dragon installed on another computer, you can use it to create custom words and export the words to a .txt file. See "To export a list of custom words or phrases" in the main Dragon Help file.

Notes: l

Type the written form of the word first.

l

To add a multiple-word phrase, such as "Mayberry Tribune", type it on one line.

l

To add a spoken form of a word, type the word, followed by two backslashes \\, and the spoken form of the word. For example, to have Dragon enter "Robert F. Kennedy" when you say "RFK", in the text file, type Robert F. Kennedy\\RFK.


Export words from a Dragon installation

If you have Dragon available on another machine, you can use it to create custom words and export the words to a .txt file. For more information, see "To export a list of custom words or phrases" in the main Dragon Help file.

Add custom words to a shared location

When you use nsadmin, you can enter paths as complete local paths, relative paths, mapped network drives, a UNC path, or the path to removable media such as a CD-ROM

drive. For more information, see Using paths with nsadmin .

Perform the following steps after you create a text file that contains custom words or after you export words from an installation of Dragon:

1. If you have not already created it, create the data distribution directory. For more inform-

ation, see Creating the Data Distribution Directory on page 265.

2. On each computer that a user uses for dictation, map a network drive to the location of the data distribution directory. As an alternative, you may reference the network UNC address of the location of the nsadmin utility.

3. In a command prompt, type a command to add the custom words from the .txt file. The following command copies the NewWords.txt file to the

In Windows 7/Windows 8

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\Custom\Enx\NewWords.txt

directory:

<PATH>\nsadmin /words G:\NsAdmin\NewWords.txt

The next time you open a user, Dragon automatically updates the user's words to include the words from the .txt file.

Use the command line to overwrite a custom word file

1. Use the /overwrite option to overwrite an existing custom word file. If the custom word file already exists in the \ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\Custom\enx directory, Dragon overwrites it without prompting you.

The following command overwrites the NewWords.txtcustom word file:

<PATH>\nsadmin /words G:\NsAdmin\NewWords.txt /overwrite=yes

Note

If you add custom words to a Commands Only vocabulary, Dragon does not retain those words if you upgrade the user at a later date. In general, you should not add custom words to a Commands Only vocabulary.

268


Adding and removing custom Vocabularies from a command line

You can use nsadmin to make a customized Vocabulary available to all users on a particular installation of Dragon. For example, you can use nsadmin to copy a user's Vocabulary and set it as the base Vocabulary on any installation of Dragon. After you add a base Vocabulary to an installation of Dragon, new users you create can use that Vocabulary.

The nsadmin command uses the following syntax:

<PATH>\nsadmin /vocabulary <directory> "<language or dialect> | <model name> |

<category>" <topic_ID>

Parameters Description

<language or dialect>

Links a Vocabulary to a language. For example, US English or UK English for an English install. The language or dialect must exist in the version of Dragon on the computer.

<model_ name>

Specifies the size of the Vocabulary you are importing.

<category> Describes the content of the Vocabulary, for example, Astronomy or Marketing.

<topic_ID> Sets an ID for a topic.

The following nsadmin command copies the model name (Large), the category (Nuance), and the topic ID (9005) to the models.ini file and copies the contents of the myvoc directory to

\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\Data\enx\Custom9005\.

<PATH>\nsadmin /vocabulary G:\NsAdmin\myvoc "US English | Large |

Nuance" 9005

Notes n

The default installation of Dragon installs Vocabularies for existing Dragon users in the following directory:

\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\Users\<user_name>\current n

Vocabulary files have a *.voc file extension.

n

In the Professional and Legal editions of Dragon, you can use Voctool to customize a

Vocabulary. For more information on Voctool, see Customizing Vocabularies with the

Dragon Vocabulary Tool (Voctool).

n

If you create a User Profile on a dual core machine that uses a custom Vocabulary, make sure that the User Profile uses the BestMatch V speech model (BestMatch V has the greatest recognition accuracy on dual-core systems with more than 2 GB of RAM).

To check this, select the Advance button on the Creating a User Profile screen of the

New User Profile wizard and make sure that BestMatch V is selected.

Prepare to use the command line to add a Vocabulary


ation, see Creating the Data Distribution Directory

.

269


2. On each computer that a user uses for dictation, in a command prompt, start the nsad-

min utility and use it to add the Vocabulary to the data distribution directory. Make sure to reference the network UNC address of the computer in the command. Use the following syntax for the command:

<PATH>\nsadmin /vocabulary <directory> "<language or dialect> |

<model name> | <category>" <topic_ID>

The next time you open a user, Dragon automatically updates the user's

Vocabularies. For more information on using the nsadmin utility, see Starting the nsadmin command line utility

.

Use the command line to overwrite a Vocabulary

1. Use the /overwrite option to overwrite an existing Vocabulary file. If the Vocabulary file already exists in \Pro-

gramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\Data\enx\Custom9005\, Dragon overwrites it without prompting you.

The following command overwrites the myvoc topic:

<PATH>\nsadmin /vocabulary G:\NsAdmin\myvoc "US English | Large |

Nuance" 9005 /overwrite=yes

Use the command line to add an exported Vocabulary

You can use the nsadmin utility to distribute a Vocabulary that you create using a separate installation of Dragon. A Dragon Vocabulary that you export saves as a group of files.

One of the exported files has a .top file extension, the other files have .to* file extensions, where * is an integer.

1. In a command prompt, provide the path to the file with the .top file extension as an argument to the nsadmin utility. Do NOT include the .top file extension on the command line.

The following command adds the myvoc exported topic (myvoc.top) as a new base

Vocabulary:

<PATH>\nsadmin /vocabulary D:\MyDocuments\myvoc "US English |

Large | Nuance" 9005

Use the command line to remove a base Vocabulary

1. On each client computer, in a command prompt, enter a command to delete the Vocabulary and the corresponding entry in models.ini. You cannot use Vocabularies that are based on a base Vocabulary you delete. Use the following syntax:

<PATH>\nsadmin /vocabulary delete <topic_ID>

The following nsadmin command deletes a Vocabulary with a topic id of 9005:

<PATH>\nsadmin /vocabulary delete 9005

270


Adding custom commands from a command line

Custom commands are voice commands that you can create and modify to enter text, insert graphics, or activate menus and keystrokes in any application. You can use the

MyCommands Editor to create custom commands or the Command Browser to modify custom commands.

You can use the nsadmin tool to copy a set of custom commands to the data distribution directory and make the set of custom commands available to all users of a particular installation of Dragon

Before you use the nsadmin utility, you must have already created a data distribution

directory, as explained in Creating the Data Distribution Directory .

Notes n

The default installation of Dragon places custom commands for existing Dragon users here:

In Windows 7/Windows 8

C:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\custom\<language>\NewWords.txt

n

After you import the custom commands to Dragon, for the changes to become available to those users, you must close your users, then re-open and save the users. n

You can enter a path as a complete local path, a relative path, a mapped network drive, a UNC path, or the path to removable media, such as a DVD or CD drive. For more

information, see Using paths with nsadmin

.

Use the command line to add custom commands

Use the Command Browser Manage mode to export custom commands to a .dat file.

1. In Dragon,create custom commands.

2. Use the Command Browser to export the custom commands to a .dat file, for example,

NewCommands.dat.


ation, see Creating the Data Distribution Directory

.

4. On each computer that a user uses for dictation, in a command prompt, type a command line using the following syntax, to add the custom commands from the .dat file. Reference the network address of the data distribution directory in the command:

<PATH>\nsadmin /commands G:\NsAdmin\NewCommands.dat

The next time you open a user, Dragon updates the commands in the User Profile for the user.

Use the command line to add custom commands to a language other than English

Use the /language option to associate commands with a non-English language.

The following command associates the NewCommands.dat file with the language of

French.

271


<PATH>\nsadmin /commands G:\NsAdmin\NewCommands.dat /language=fra

Use the command line to overwrite a custom command file

Use the /overwrite option to overwrite an existing command file.

The following command overwrites the NewCommands.dat file if it already exists in the

G:\NsAdmin directory. Dragon overwrites the file without prompting you.

<PATH>\nsadmin /commands G:\NsAdmin\NewCommands.dat /overwrite=yes

Using paths with nsadmin

When you use the nsadmin utility, you can use a path that is a complete local path, a relative path, a mapped network drive, a UNC path, or the path to removable media, such as a DVD or CD drive. If a path name includes spaces, you must enclose the path name in quotation marks.

When you are running nsadmin from a directory other than the one nsadmin resides in, you must provide the full path to the nsadmin.exe program on the command line.

The following command copies the NewCommands.dat file to the

<drive>:\ProgramData\Nuance\NaturallySpeaking13\custom\enx\NewC ommands.dat directory.

<PATH>\nsadmin /commands \\HostComputer\NsAdmin\NewCommands.dat

272


Glossary

273

.DRA files (definition)

Dragon Recorded Audio (DRA) files. By default, Dragon automatically saves audio and text transcripts of your dictation in the DRA files.

Accuracy Center (definition)

Offers a central location for tools and information you can use to ensure recognition. The link in the description of each feature opens a topic describing that feature more completely. Say

“display Accuracy Center” or click "Improve my accuracy" on the DragonBar Help menu.

Accuracy Tuning (definition)

A process Dragon can use to adapt to your usage. Once you have been dictating for a period of time, Dragon uses Accuracy Tuning to automatically refine your User Profile, analyzing your dictation, corrections, and any other acoustic training you have done. Accuracy Tuning uses two of Dragon's accuracy tools, the Acoustic Optimizer and the Language Model

Optimizer.

Acoustic Optimizer (definition)

Looks for any corrections you have made or additional training you may have performed.

Optimization enhances recognition accuracy and helps predict words most likely spoken in a given context by a speaker (the language model).

Advanced Scripting (definition)

Supports using programming languages such as Microsoft® VBA to create commands that can perform virtually any function on the computer with voice commands.

Commands-only Vocabulary (definition)

A restricted Vocabulary containing only words and phrases that Dragon recognizes as commands. Choose this way of dictation if you want to use Dragon only for command and control of programs and not for dictation.

Command Browser (definition)

A window showing voice commands that Dragon recognizes, including commands that are provided with the software as well as any commands that you or your system administrator might have added (custom commands). The Command Browser is the most comprehensive place to see the commands that are available in each application.

Correction menu (definition)

Shows Dragon’s best guess for alternatives to words you dictated and selected. Choose the correct word from the Correction menu by saying “Choose” and the number next to your choice.

Command Mode (definition)

A restricted recognition mode that causes Dragon to interpret everything you say as a command and nothing is interpreted as dictated text. Say "Start Command Mode" or

"Command Mode On".

Correction-only mode (definition)

Enables transcriptionists to play back a Dragon end-user's dictation without having their

User Profile loaded. Note that dictation is disabled if you select this option.

Data Distribution Tool (definition)

Enables developers to interactively create new words, customized Vocabularies or commands, and to make them available to all User Profiles on a particular Dragon installation.

Dictation Box (definition)

Provides full support for dictating and editing text in non-standard windows. The

Dictation I Box supports voice commands like Delete, Correct, and Insert, and custom commands as well. When you are finished, the content is transferred to the non-standard window where your cursor was positioned when you opened the Dictation Box. The

Dictation Box can be anchored or unanchored.

Dictation Mode (definition)

A restricted recognition mode that causes Dragon to interpret everything you say as dictation and nothing is interpreted as a command. Dictation Mode can be helpful if you want to dictate as quickly as possible, or dictate without looking at the words Dragon transcribes.

Say "Start Dictation Mode" or "Dictation Mode On".

Dictation Source (definition)

An audio input device or multiple devices associated with a User Profile. An end-user can select a headset microphone at one computer, an array microphone at another, and a portable recorder for transcription at several computers. This way, Dragon supports end-

Glossary

274

Dragon NaturallySpeaking 13 Administrator Guide users that need to move, or “roam”, from computer to computer regardless of the microphone type or differences in ambient noise.

Dragon Web Extension (definition)

Enables page element commands such as "Click Link" and "Click Button" and Full Text

Control in supported browsers and Web-based applications. With the Dragon Web Extension

installed and enabled, you can dictate content and use commands just as you would in a desktop program. Without the extension, you'll need to click Web page elements using your mouse and keyboard, and dictate content using the Dictation Box.

DragonPad (definition)

Dragon’s built-in word processor, optimized for dictation and includes basic text formatting features as well as the ability to save and print documents.

Full Text Control (definition)

Refers to the level of dictation support available in Web and desktop programs and windows when Dragon fully supports creating, editing, and formatting content. When a program or part of a program has Full Text Control, you can move the cursor reliably – for example, to the beginning or end of a line or paragraph. You can also select, format, and revise text as needed using Direct Editing commands, the Correction menu, or the Spelling Window.

For supported Web applications, Full Text Control is activated using the Dragon web extension in supported browsers.

When the cursor is in a text field for which Dragon has Full Text Control, the Text Control

Indicator on the Classic DragonBar ( ) or the New DragonBar ( ) is green when all of

Dragon's selection and dictation capabilities are supported.

Language Model optimization (definition)

Updates the language model of the current Vocabulary. Language Model Optimization uses text Dragon extracts from the .DRA files that are created when you correct words. Based on the speech data collected, Language Model Optimization applies modifications to the language model to reflect your word usage.

Language Model Optimizer (definition)

Performs Language Model Optimization from the Accuracy Center. Any Dragon end-user with administrator privileges can schedule Dragon to perform optimization periodically.

Normal Mode (definition)

Dragon's default mode of dictation. In Normal Mode, Dragon distinguishes dictation from words, numbers, and commands by analyzing what you say between pauses. Say "Start

Normal Mode" or "Normal Mode On".

275

Numbers mode (definition)

A restricted recognition mode that causes Dragon to recognize only numbers, commands, and punctuation. If you are dictating only numbers (including currencies), working in this mode increases recognition accuracy. Say "Start Numbers Mode" or "Numbers Mode On".

QuickStart (definition)

Allows Dragon NaturallySpeaking Professional to load in the background when you start your computer or log in to your operating system, depending on your version of Windows.

When Dragon is launched in QuickStart mode, Dragon is available for use more quickly than when you start in normal mode. The microphone icon appears in the system tray.

Recognition Modes (definition)

By default, Dragon functions in Normal Mode, distinguishing dictation from words, numbers, and commands, and analyzing what it hears between pauses. Dragon also offers restricted recognition modes for dictating only commands (Command Mode), numbers (Numbers

Mode), characters (Spell Mode), or words (Dictation Mode).

Roaming User (definition)

Enables you to dictate with Dragon from different network locations and on different computers without having to create and train individual User Profiles at each location. User

Profiles are stored in a network location available to all computers on the network, so that the information Dragon learns from an end-user dictating on one computer is also available to the same end-user when they log in on other computers.

Spell Mode (definition)

A restricted recognition mode that causes Dragon to recognize only letters, numbers, commands, and punctuation. Spell mode is useful for dictating unpronounceable alphanumeric strings, such as part numbers and license plate numbers, and other terms you anticipate Dragon may not recognize, such as Web addresses, words in a foreign language, or unusual product names. Say "Start Spell Mode" or "Spell Mode On". You can still use commands while in Spell Mode.

User Profile (definition)

A set of files created the first time you use Dragon, which is subsequently used to reflect your characteristics and adapt to your usage. Each person who uses Dragon must have a User

Profile, which the software stores in a set of files containing, among other things, acoustic and lexical data. These data contain information about how you sound, and the words you use, and how often you use them. When you add a word to your Dragon Vocabulary, make corrections, read a training text, or change a setting in the Options dialog, Dragon can save these refinements in your User Profile. If your edition of Dragon supports custom commands, these are also saved in the User Profile.

Glossary

276


Web application support (definition)

Provides the Dragon web extension

in supported Web browsers to enable commands and

Full Text Control for selected browser-based applications. With the Dragon web extension

installed and enabled, you can dictate content and use commands just as you would in a desktop program.

277